mirror of
https://github.com/tildearrow/furnace.git
synced 2024-11-18 02:25:11 +00:00
3325 lines
320 KiB
C++
3325 lines
320 KiB
C++
// dear imgui, v1.88 WIP
|
|
// (headers)
|
|
|
|
// Help:
|
|
// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.org/faq
|
|
// - Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' in imgui.cpp for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
|
|
// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that.
|
|
// Read imgui.cpp for details, links and comments.
|
|
|
|
// Resources:
|
|
// - FAQ http://dearimgui.org/faq
|
|
// - Homepage & latest https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
|
|
// - Releases & changelog https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases
|
|
// - Gallery https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/5243 (please post your screenshots/video there!)
|
|
// - Wiki https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki (lots of good stuff there)
|
|
// - Glossary https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary
|
|
// - Issues & support https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues
|
|
|
|
// Getting Started?
|
|
// - For first-time users having issues compiling/linking/running or issues loading fonts:
|
|
// please post in https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/discussions if you cannot find a solution in resources above.
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
Index of this file:
|
|
// [SECTION] Header mess
|
|
// [SECTION] Forward declarations and basic types
|
|
// [SECTION] Dear ImGui end-user API functions
|
|
// [SECTION] Flags & Enumerations
|
|
// [SECTION] Helpers: Memory allocations macros, ImVector<>
|
|
// [SECTION] ImGuiStyle
|
|
// [SECTION] ImGuiIO
|
|
// [SECTION] Misc data structures (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData, ImGuiSizeCallbackData, ImGuiWindowClass, ImGuiPayload, ImGuiTableSortSpecs, ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs)
|
|
// [SECTION] Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, ImColor)
|
|
// [SECTION] Drawing API (ImDrawCallback, ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListSplitter, ImDrawFlags, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData)
|
|
// [SECTION] Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFont)
|
|
// [SECTION] Viewports (ImGuiViewportFlags, ImGuiViewport)
|
|
// [SECTION] Platform Dependent Interfaces (ImGuiPlatformIO, ImGuiPlatformMonitor, ImGuiPlatformImeData)
|
|
// [SECTION] Obsolete functions and types
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
#pragma once
|
|
|
|
// Configuration file with compile-time options (edit imconfig.h or '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "myfilename.h" from your build system')
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
|
|
#include IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
|
|
#endif
|
|
#if !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_INCLUDE_IMCONFIG_H) || defined(IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMCONFIG_H)
|
|
#include "imconfig.h"
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Header mess
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Includes
|
|
#include <float.h> // FLT_MIN, FLT_MAX
|
|
#include <stdarg.h> // va_list, va_start, va_end
|
|
#include <stddef.h> // ptrdiff_t, NULL
|
|
#include <string.h> // memset, memmove, memcpy, strlen, strchr, strcpy, strcmp
|
|
|
|
// Version
|
|
// (Integer encoded as XYYZZ for use in #if preprocessor conditionals. Work in progress versions typically starts at XYY99 then bounce up to XYY00, XYY01 etc. when release tagging happens)
|
|
#define IMGUI_VERSION "1.88 WIP"
|
|
#define IMGUI_VERSION_NUM 18721
|
|
#define IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(IMGUI_VERSION, sizeof(ImGuiIO), sizeof(ImGuiStyle), sizeof(ImVec2), sizeof(ImVec4), sizeof(ImDrawVert), sizeof(ImDrawIdx))
|
|
#define IMGUI_HAS_TABLE
|
|
#define IMGUI_HAS_VIEWPORT // Viewport WIP branch
|
|
#define IMGUI_HAS_DOCK // Docking WIP branch
|
|
|
|
// Define attributes of all API symbols declarations (e.g. for DLL under Windows)
|
|
// IMGUI_API is used for core imgui functions, IMGUI_IMPL_API is used for the default backends files (imgui_impl_xxx.h)
|
|
// Using dear imgui via a shared library is not recommended, because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility (also function call overhead, as dear imgui is a call-heavy API)
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_API
|
|
#define IMGUI_API
|
|
#endif
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_API
|
|
#define IMGUI_IMPL_API IMGUI_API
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Helper Macros
|
|
#ifndef IM_ASSERT
|
|
#include <assert.h>
|
|
#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR) assert(_EXPR) // You can override the default assert handler by editing imconfig.h
|
|
#endif
|
|
#define IM_ARRAYSIZE(_ARR) ((int)(sizeof(_ARR) / sizeof(*(_ARR)))) // Size of a static C-style array. Don't use on pointers!
|
|
#define IM_UNUSED(_VAR) ((void)(_VAR)) // Used to silence "unused variable warnings". Often useful as asserts may be stripped out from final builds.
|
|
#define IM_OFFSETOF(_TYPE,_MEMBER) offsetof(_TYPE, _MEMBER) // Offset of _MEMBER within _TYPE. Standardized as offsetof() in C++11
|
|
|
|
// Helper Macros - IM_FMTARGS, IM_FMTLIST: Apply printf-style warnings to our formatting functions.
|
|
#if !defined(IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF) && defined(__MINGW32__) && !defined(__clang__)
|
|
#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT) __attribute__((format(gnu_printf, FMT, FMT+1)))
|
|
#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT) __attribute__((format(gnu_printf, FMT, 0)))
|
|
#elif !defined(IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF) && (defined(__clang__) || defined(__GNUC__))
|
|
#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT) __attribute__((format(printf, FMT, FMT+1)))
|
|
#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT) __attribute__((format(printf, FMT, 0)))
|
|
#else
|
|
#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT)
|
|
#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Disable some of MSVC most aggressive Debug runtime checks in function header/footer (used in some simple/low-level functions)
|
|
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__) && !defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && !defined(IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID)
|
|
#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF __pragma(runtime_checks("",off)) __pragma(check_stack(off)) __pragma(strict_gs_check(push,off))
|
|
#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE __pragma(runtime_checks("",restore)) __pragma(check_stack()) __pragma(strict_gs_check(pop))
|
|
#else
|
|
#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
|
|
#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Warnings
|
|
#ifdef _MSC_VER
|
|
#pragma warning (push)
|
|
#pragma warning (disable: 26495) // [Static Analyzer] Variable 'XXX' is uninitialized. Always initialize a member variable (type.6).
|
|
#endif
|
|
#if defined(__clang__)
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic push
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"
|
|
#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"
|
|
#endif
|
|
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
|
|
#pragma GCC diagnostic push
|
|
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
|
|
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Forward declarations and basic types
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Forward declarations
|
|
struct ImDrawChannel; // Temporary storage to output draw commands out of order, used by ImDrawListSplitter and ImDrawList::ChannelsSplit()
|
|
struct ImDrawCmd; // A single draw command within a parent ImDrawList (generally maps to 1 GPU draw call, unless it is a callback)
|
|
struct ImDrawData; // All draw command lists required to render the frame + pos/size coordinates to use for the projection matrix.
|
|
struct ImDrawList; // A single draw command list (generally one per window, conceptually you may see this as a dynamic "mesh" builder)
|
|
struct ImDrawListSharedData; // Data shared among multiple draw lists (typically owned by parent ImGui context, but you may create one yourself)
|
|
struct ImDrawListSplitter; // Helper to split a draw list into different layers which can be drawn into out of order, then flattened back.
|
|
struct ImDrawVert; // A single vertex (pos + uv + col = 20 bytes by default. Override layout with IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT)
|
|
struct ImFont; // Runtime data for a single font within a parent ImFontAtlas
|
|
struct ImFontAtlas; // Runtime data for multiple fonts, bake multiple fonts into a single texture, TTF/OTF font loader
|
|
struct ImFontBuilderIO; // Opaque interface to a font builder (stb_truetype or FreeType).
|
|
struct ImFontConfig; // Configuration data when adding a font or merging fonts
|
|
struct ImFontGlyph; // A single font glyph (code point + coordinates within in ImFontAtlas + offset)
|
|
struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder; // Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data
|
|
struct ImColor; // Helper functions to create a color that can be converted to either u32 or float4 (*OBSOLETE* please avoid using)
|
|
struct ImGuiContext; // Dear ImGui context (opaque structure, unless including imgui_internal.h)
|
|
struct ImGuiIO; // Main configuration and I/O between your application and ImGui
|
|
struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData; // Shared state of InputText() when using custom ImGuiInputTextCallback (rare/advanced use)
|
|
struct ImGuiKeyData; // Storage for ImGuiIO and IsKeyDown(), IsKeyPressed() etc functions.
|
|
struct ImGuiListClipper; // Helper to manually clip large list of items
|
|
struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame; // Helper for running a block of code not more than once a frame
|
|
struct ImGuiPayload; // User data payload for drag and drop operations
|
|
struct ImGuiPlatformIO; // Multi-viewport support: interface for Platform/Renderer backends + viewports to render
|
|
struct ImGuiPlatformMonitor; // Multi-viewport support: user-provided bounds for each connected monitor/display. Used when positioning popups and tooltips to avoid them straddling monitors
|
|
struct ImGuiPlatformImeData; // Platform IME data for io.SetPlatformImeDataFn() function.
|
|
struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData; // Callback data when using SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() (rare/advanced use)
|
|
struct ImGuiStorage; // Helper for key->value storage
|
|
struct ImGuiStyle; // Runtime data for styling/colors
|
|
struct ImGuiTableSortSpecs; // Sorting specifications for a table (often handling sort specs for a single column, occasionally more)
|
|
struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs; // Sorting specification for one column of a table
|
|
struct ImGuiTextBuffer; // Helper to hold and append into a text buffer (~string builder)
|
|
struct ImGuiTextFilter; // Helper to parse and apply text filters (e.g. "aaaaa[,bbbbb][,ccccc]")
|
|
struct ImGuiViewport; // A Platform Window (always 1 unless multi-viewport are enabled. One per platform window to output to). In the future may represent Platform Monitor
|
|
struct ImGuiWindowClass; // Window class (rare/advanced uses: provide hints to the platform backend via altered viewport flags and parent/child info)
|
|
|
|
// Enums/Flags (declared as int for compatibility with old C++, to allow using as flags without overhead, and to not pollute the top of this file)
|
|
// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _central column_ below to find the actual flags/enum lists!
|
|
// In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
|
|
// With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
|
|
typedef int ImGuiCol; // -> enum ImGuiCol_ // Enum: A color identifier for styling
|
|
typedef int ImGuiCond; // -> enum ImGuiCond_ // Enum: A condition for many Set*() functions
|
|
typedef int ImGuiDataType; // -> enum ImGuiDataType_ // Enum: A primary data type
|
|
typedef int ImGuiDir; // -> enum ImGuiDir_ // Enum: A cardinal direction
|
|
typedef int ImGuiKey; // -> enum ImGuiKey_ // Enum: A key identifier
|
|
typedef int ImGuiNavInput; // -> enum ImGuiNavInput_ // Enum: An input identifier for navigation
|
|
typedef int ImGuiMouseButton; // -> enum ImGuiMouseButton_ // Enum: A mouse button identifier (0=left, 1=right, 2=middle)
|
|
typedef int ImGuiMouseCursor; // -> enum ImGuiMouseCursor_ // Enum: A mouse cursor identifier
|
|
typedef int ImGuiSortDirection; // -> enum ImGuiSortDirection_ // Enum: A sorting direction (ascending or descending)
|
|
typedef int ImGuiStyleVar; // -> enum ImGuiStyleVar_ // Enum: A variable identifier for styling
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTableBgTarget; // -> enum ImGuiTableBgTarget_ // Enum: A color target for TableSetBgColor()
|
|
typedef int ImDrawFlags; // -> enum ImDrawFlags_ // Flags: for ImDrawList functions
|
|
typedef int ImDrawListFlags; // -> enum ImDrawListFlags_ // Flags: for ImDrawList instance
|
|
typedef int ImFontAtlasFlags; // -> enum ImFontAtlasFlags_ // Flags: for ImFontAtlas build
|
|
typedef int ImGuiBackendFlags; // -> enum ImGuiBackendFlags_ // Flags: for io.BackendFlags
|
|
typedef int ImGuiButtonFlags; // -> enum ImGuiButtonFlags_ // Flags: for InvisibleButton()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiColorEditFlags; // -> enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ // Flags: for ColorEdit4(), ColorPicker4() etc.
|
|
typedef int ImGuiConfigFlags; // -> enum ImGuiConfigFlags_ // Flags: for io.ConfigFlags
|
|
typedef int ImGuiComboFlags; // -> enum ImGuiComboFlags_ // Flags: for BeginCombo()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiDockNodeFlags; // -> enum ImGuiDockNodeFlags_ // Flags: for DockSpace()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiDragDropFlags; // -> enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_ // Flags: for BeginDragDropSource(), AcceptDragDropPayload()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiFocusedFlags; // -> enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_ // Flags: for IsWindowFocused()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiHoveredFlags; // -> enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_ // Flags: for IsItemHovered(), IsWindowHovered() etc.
|
|
typedef int ImGuiInputTextFlags; // -> enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_ // Flags: for InputText(), InputTextMultiline()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiModFlags; // -> enum ImGuiModFlags_ // Flags: for io.KeyMods (Ctrl/Shift/Alt/Super)
|
|
typedef int ImGuiPopupFlags; // -> enum ImGuiPopupFlags_ // Flags: for OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(), IsPopupOpen()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiSelectableFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_ // Flags: for Selectable()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiSliderFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSliderFlags_ // Flags: for DragFloat(), DragInt(), SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc.
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTabBarFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTabBar()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTabItemFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTabItem()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTableFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableFlags_ // Flags: For BeginTable()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTableColumnFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_// Flags: For TableSetupColumn()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTableRowFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableRowFlags_ // Flags: For TableNextRow()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTreeNodeFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ // Flags: for TreeNode(), TreeNodeEx(), CollapsingHeader()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiViewportFlags; // -> enum ImGuiViewportFlags_ // Flags: for ImGuiViewport
|
|
typedef int ImGuiWindowFlags; // -> enum ImGuiWindowFlags_ // Flags: for Begin(), BeginChild()
|
|
|
|
// ImTexture: user data for renderer backend to identify a texture [Compile-time configurable type]
|
|
// - To use something else than an opaque void* pointer: override with e.g. '#define ImTextureID MyTextureType*' in your imconfig.h file.
|
|
// - This can be whatever to you want it to be! read the FAQ about ImTextureID for details.
|
|
#ifndef ImTextureID
|
|
typedef void* ImTextureID; // Default: store a pointer or an integer fitting in a pointer (most renderer backends are ok with that)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// ImDrawIdx: vertex index. [Compile-time configurable type]
|
|
// - To use 16-bit indices + allow large meshes: backend need to set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' and handle ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset (recommended).
|
|
// - To use 32-bit indices: override with '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' in your imconfig.h file.
|
|
#ifndef ImDrawIdx
|
|
typedef unsigned short ImDrawIdx; // Default: 16-bit (for maximum compatibility with renderer backends)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Scalar data types
|
|
typedef unsigned int ImGuiID;// A unique ID used by widgets (typically the result of hashing a stack of string)
|
|
typedef signed char ImS8; // 8-bit signed integer
|
|
typedef unsigned char ImU8; // 8-bit unsigned integer
|
|
typedef signed short ImS16; // 16-bit signed integer
|
|
typedef unsigned short ImU16; // 16-bit unsigned integer
|
|
typedef signed int ImS32; // 32-bit signed integer == int
|
|
typedef unsigned int ImU32; // 32-bit unsigned integer (often used to store packed colors)
|
|
typedef signed long long ImS64; // 64-bit signed integer
|
|
typedef unsigned long long ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer
|
|
|
|
// Character types
|
|
// (we generally use UTF-8 encoded string in the API. This is storage specifically for a decoded character used for keyboard input and display)
|
|
typedef unsigned short ImWchar16; // A single decoded U16 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
|
|
typedef unsigned int ImWchar32; // A single decoded U32 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32 // ImWchar [configurable type: override in imconfig.h with '#define IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32' to support Unicode planes 1-16]
|
|
typedef ImWchar32 ImWchar;
|
|
#else
|
|
typedef ImWchar16 ImWchar;
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Callback and functions types
|
|
typedef int (*ImGuiInputTextCallback)(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data); // Callback function for ImGui::InputText()
|
|
typedef void (*ImGuiSizeCallback)(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data); // Callback function for ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints()
|
|
typedef void* (*ImGuiMemAllocFunc)(size_t sz, void* user_data); // Function signature for ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions()
|
|
typedef void (*ImGuiMemFreeFunc)(void* ptr, void* user_data); // Function signature for ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions()
|
|
|
|
// ImVec2: 2D vector used to store positions, sizes etc. [Compile-time configurable type]
|
|
// This is a frequently used type in the API. Consider using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA to create implicit cast from/to our preferred type.
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
|
|
struct ImVec2
|
|
{
|
|
float x, y;
|
|
constexpr ImVec2() : x(0.0f), y(0.0f) { }
|
|
constexpr ImVec2(float _x, float _y) : x(_x), y(_y) { }
|
|
float operator[] (size_t idx) const { IM_ASSERT(idx <= 1); return (&x)[idx]; } // We very rarely use this [] operator, the assert overhead is fine.
|
|
float& operator[] (size_t idx) { IM_ASSERT(idx <= 1); return (&x)[idx]; } // We very rarely use this [] operator, the assert overhead is fine.
|
|
#ifdef IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA
|
|
IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and ImVec2.
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// ImVec4: 4D vector used to store clipping rectangles, colors etc. [Compile-time configurable type]
|
|
struct ImVec4
|
|
{
|
|
float x, y, z, w;
|
|
constexpr ImVec4() : x(0.0f), y(0.0f), z(0.0f), w(0.0f) { }
|
|
constexpr ImVec4(float _x, float _y, float _z, float _w) : x(_x), y(_y), z(_z), w(_w) { }
|
|
#ifdef IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA
|
|
IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and ImVec4.
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Dear ImGui end-user API functions
|
|
// (Note that ImGui:: being a namespace, you can add extra ImGui:: functions in your own separate file. Please don't modify imgui source files!)
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
namespace ImGui
|
|
{
|
|
// Context creation and access
|
|
// - Each context create its own ImFontAtlas by default. You may instance one yourself and pass it to CreateContext() to share a font atlas between contexts.
|
|
// - DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions()
|
|
// for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for details.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiContext* CreateContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void DestroyContext(ImGuiContext* ctx = NULL); // NULL = destroy current context
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiContext* GetCurrentContext();
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCurrentContext(ImGuiContext* ctx);
|
|
|
|
// Main
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiIO& GetIO(); // access the IO structure (mouse/keyboard/gamepad inputs, time, various configuration options/flags)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiStyle& GetStyle(); // access the Style structure (colors, sizes). Always use PushStyleCol(), PushStyleVar() to modify style mid-frame!
|
|
IMGUI_API void NewFrame(); // start a new Dear ImGui frame, you can submit any command from this point until Render()/EndFrame().
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndFrame(); // ends the Dear ImGui frame. automatically called by Render(). If you don't need to render data (skipping rendering) you may call EndFrame() without Render()... but you'll have wasted CPU already! If you don't need to render, better to not create any windows and not call NewFrame() at all!
|
|
IMGUI_API void Render(); // ends the Dear ImGui frame, finalize the draw data. You can then get call GetDrawData().
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawData* GetDrawData(); // valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame(). this is what you have to render.
|
|
|
|
// Demo, Debug, Information
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Demo window. demonstrate most ImGui features. call this to learn about the library! try to make it always available in your application!
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Metrics/Debugger window. display Dear ImGui internals: windows, draw commands, various internal state, etc.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowStackToolWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Stack Tool window. hover items with mouse to query information about the source of their unique ID.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create About window. display Dear ImGui version, credits and build/system information.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref = NULL); // add style editor block (not a window). you can pass in a reference ImGuiStyle structure to compare to, revert to and save to (else it uses the default style)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ShowStyleSelector(const char* label); // add style selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the default styles.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowFontSelector(const char* label); // add font selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the loaded fonts.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowUserGuide(); // add basic help/info block (not a window): how to manipulate ImGui as a end-user (mouse/keyboard controls).
|
|
IMGUI_API const char* GetVersion(); // get the compiled version string e.g. "1.80 WIP" (essentially the value for IMGUI_VERSION from the compiled version of imgui.cpp)
|
|
|
|
// Styles
|
|
IMGUI_API void StyleColorsDark(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // new, recommended style (default)
|
|
IMGUI_API void StyleColorsLight(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // best used with borders and a custom, thicker font
|
|
IMGUI_API void StyleColorsClassic(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // classic imgui style
|
|
|
|
// Windows
|
|
// - Begin() = push window to the stack and start appending to it. End() = pop window from the stack.
|
|
// - Passing 'bool* p_open != NULL' shows a window-closing widget in the upper-right corner of the window,
|
|
// which clicking will set the boolean to false when clicked.
|
|
// - You may append multiple times to the same window during the same frame by calling Begin()/End() pairs multiple times.
|
|
// Some information such as 'flags' or 'p_open' will only be considered by the first call to Begin().
|
|
// - Begin() return false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting
|
|
// anything to the window. Always call a matching End() for each Begin() call, regardless of its return value!
|
|
// [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu,
|
|
// BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function
|
|
// returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
|
|
// - Note that the bottom of window stack always contains a window called "Debug".
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void End();
|
|
|
|
// Child Windows
|
|
// - Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window. Child windows can embed their own child.
|
|
// - For each independent axis of 'size': ==0.0f: use remaining host window size / >0.0f: fixed size / <0.0f: use remaining window size minus abs(size) / Each axis can use a different mode, e.g. ImVec2(0,400).
|
|
// - BeginChild() returns false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting anything to the window.
|
|
// Always call a matching EndChild() for each BeginChild() call, regardless of its return value.
|
|
// [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu,
|
|
// BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function
|
|
// returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndChild();
|
|
|
|
// Windows Utilities
|
|
// - 'current window' = the window we are appending into while inside a Begin()/End() block. 'next window' = next window we will Begin() into.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowAppearing();
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowCollapsed();
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags=0); // is current window focused? or its root/child, depending on flags. see flags for options.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags=0); // is current window hovered (and typically: not blocked by a popup/modal)? see flags for options. NB: If you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to imgui or to your app, you should use the 'io.WantCaptureMouse' boolean for that! Please read the FAQ!
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetWindowDrawList(); // get draw list associated to the current window, to append your own drawing primitives
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetWindowDpiScale(); // get DPI scale currently associated to the current window's viewport.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowPos(); // get current window position in screen space (useful if you want to do your own drawing via the DrawList API)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowSize(); // get current window size
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetWindowWidth(); // get current window width (shortcut for GetWindowSize().x)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetWindowHeight(); // get current window height (shortcut for GetWindowSize().y)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport*GetWindowViewport(); // get viewport currently associated to the current window.
|
|
|
|
// Window manipulation
|
|
// - Prefer using SetNextXXX functions (before Begin) rather that SetXXX functions (after Begin).
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0, const ImVec2& pivot = ImVec2(0, 0)); // set next window position. call before Begin(). use pivot=(0.5f,0.5f) to center on given point, etc.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis. call before Begin()
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback = NULL, void* custom_callback_data = NULL); // set next window size limits. use -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size. Sizes will be rounded down. Use callback to apply non-trivial programmatic constraints.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size); // set next window content size (~ scrollable client area, which enforce the range of scrollbars). Not including window decorations (title bar, menu bar, etc.) nor WindowPadding. set an axis to 0.0f to leave it automatic. call before Begin()
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window collapsed state. call before Begin()
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowFocus(); // set next window to be focused / top-most. call before Begin()
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha); // set next window background color alpha. helper to easily override the Alpha component of ImGuiCol_WindowBg/ChildBg/PopupBg. you may also use ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowViewport(ImGuiID viewport_id); // set next window viewport
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window position - call within Begin()/End(). prefer using SetNextWindowPos(), as this may incur tearing and side-effects.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window size - call within Begin()/End(). set to ImVec2(0, 0) to force an auto-fit. prefer using SetNextWindowSize(), as this may incur tearing and minor side-effects.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window collapsed state. prefer using SetNextWindowCollapsed().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowFocus(); // (not recommended) set current window to be focused / top-most. prefer using SetNextWindowFocus().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowFontScale(float scale); // [OBSOLETE] set font scale. Adjust IO.FontGlobalScale if you want to scale all windows. This is an old API! For correct scaling, prefer to reload font + rebuild ImFontAtlas + call style.ScaleAllSizes().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(const char* name, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window position.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowSize(const char* name, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(const char* name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window collapsed state
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowFocus(const char* name); // set named window to be focused / top-most. use NULL to remove focus.
|
|
|
|
// Content region
|
|
// - Retrieve available space from a given point. GetContentRegionAvail() is frequently useful.
|
|
// - Those functions are bound to be redesigned (they are confusing, incomplete and the Min/Max return values are in local window coordinates which increases confusion)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetContentRegionAvail(); // == GetContentRegionMax() - GetCursorPos()
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetContentRegionMax(); // current content boundaries (typically window boundaries including scrolling, or current column boundaries), in windows coordinates
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowContentRegionMin(); // content boundaries min for the full window (roughly (0,0)-Scroll), in window coordinates
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowContentRegionMax(); // content boundaries max for the full window (roughly (0,0)+Size-Scroll) where Size can be override with SetNextWindowContentSize(), in window coordinates
|
|
|
|
// Windows Scrolling
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetScrollX(); // get scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxX()]
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetScrollY(); // get scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxY()]
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollX(float scroll_x); // set scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxX()]
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollY(float scroll_y); // set scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxY()]
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetScrollMaxX(); // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.x - WindowSize.x - DecorationsSize.x
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetScrollMaxY(); // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.y - WindowSize.y - DecorationsSize.y
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollHereX(float center_x_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_x_ratio=0.0: left, 0.5: center, 1.0: right. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollHereY(float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_y_ratio=0.0: top, 0.5: center, 1.0: bottom. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosX(float local_x, float center_x_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make given position visible. Generally GetCursorStartPos() + offset to compute a valid position.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosY(float local_y, float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make given position visible. Generally GetCursorStartPos() + offset to compute a valid position.
|
|
|
|
// Parameters stacks (shared)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushFont(ImFont* font); // use NULL as a shortcut to push default font
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopFont();
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col); // modify a style color. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4& col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopStyleColor(int count = 1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val); // modify a style float variable. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2& val); // modify a style ImVec2 variable. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopStyleVar(int count = 1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool allow_keyboard_focus); // == tab stop enable. Allow focusing using TAB/Shift-TAB, enabled by default but you can disable it for certain widgets
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat); // in 'repeat' mode, Button*() functions return repeated true in a typematic manner (using io.KeyRepeatDelay/io.KeyRepeatRate setting). Note that you can call IsItemActive() after any Button() to tell if the button is held in the current frame.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopButtonRepeat();
|
|
|
|
// Parameters stacks (current window)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushItemWidth(float item_width); // push width of items for common large "item+label" widgets. >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to the right of window (so -FLT_MIN always align width to the right side).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopItemWidth();
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextItemWidth(float item_width); // set width of the _next_ common large "item+label" widget. >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to the right of window (so -FLT_MIN always align width to the right side)
|
|
IMGUI_API float CalcItemWidth(); // width of item given pushed settings and current cursor position. NOT necessarily the width of last item unlike most 'Item' functions.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_local_pos_x = 0.0f); // push word-wrapping position for Text*() commands. < 0.0f: no wrapping; 0.0f: wrap to end of window (or column); > 0.0f: wrap at 'wrap_pos_x' position in window local space
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopTextWrapPos();
|
|
|
|
// Style read access
|
|
// - Use the style editor (ShowStyleEditor() function) to interactively see what the colors are)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont* GetFont(); // get current font
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetFontSize(); // get current font size (= height in pixels) of current font with current scale applied
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetFontTexUvWhitePixel(); // get UV coordinate for a while pixel, useful to draw custom shapes via the ImDrawList API
|
|
IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul = 1.0f); // retrieve given style color with style alpha applied and optional extra alpha multiplier, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
|
|
IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(const ImVec4& col); // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
|
|
IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(ImU32 col); // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImVec4& GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx); // retrieve style color as stored in ImGuiStyle structure. use to feed back into PushStyleColor(), otherwise use GetColorU32() to get style color with style alpha baked in.
|
|
|
|
// Cursor / Layout
|
|
// - By "cursor" we mean the current output position.
|
|
// - The typical widget behavior is to output themselves at the current cursor position, then move the cursor one line down.
|
|
// - You can call SameLine() between widgets to undo the last carriage return and output at the right of the preceding widget.
|
|
// - Attention! We currently have inconsistencies between window-local and absolute positions we will aim to fix with future API:
|
|
// Window-local coordinates: SameLine(), GetCursorPos(), SetCursorPos(), GetCursorStartPos(), GetContentRegionMax(), GetWindowContentRegion*(), PushTextWrapPos()
|
|
// Absolute coordinate: GetCursorScreenPos(), SetCursorScreenPos(), all ImDrawList:: functions.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Separator(); // separator, generally horizontal. inside a menu bar or in horizontal layout mode, this becomes a vertical separator.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SameLine(float offset_from_start_x=0.0f, float spacing=-1.0f); // call between widgets or groups to layout them horizontally. X position given in window coordinates.
|
|
IMGUI_API void NewLine(); // undo a SameLine() or force a new line when in an horizontal-layout context.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Spacing(); // add vertical spacing.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Dummy(const ImVec2& size); // add a dummy item of given size. unlike InvisibleButton(), Dummy() won't take the mouse click or be navigable into.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Indent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position toward the right, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0
|
|
IMGUI_API void Unindent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position back to the left, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0
|
|
IMGUI_API void BeginGroup(); // lock horizontal starting position
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndGroup(); // unlock horizontal starting position + capture the whole group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorPos(); // cursor position in window coordinates (relative to window position)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosX(); // (some functions are using window-relative coordinates, such as: GetCursorPos, GetCursorStartPos, GetContentRegionMax, GetWindowContentRegion* etc.
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosY(); // other functions such as GetCursorScreenPos or everything in ImDrawList::
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos); // are using the main, absolute coordinate system.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosX(float local_x); // GetWindowPos() + GetCursorPos() == GetCursorScreenPos() etc.)
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosY(float local_y); //
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorStartPos(); // initial cursor position in window coordinates
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorScreenPos(); // cursor position in absolute coordinates (useful to work with ImDrawList API). generally top-left == GetMainViewport()->Pos == (0,0) in single viewport mode, and bottom-right == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size == io.DisplaySize in single-viewport mode.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos); // cursor position in absolute coordinates
|
|
IMGUI_API void AlignTextToFramePadding(); // vertically align upcoming text baseline to FramePadding.y so that it will align properly to regularly framed items (call if you have text on a line before a framed item)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeight(); // ~ FontSize
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of text)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetFrameHeight(); // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2 + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of framed widgets)
|
|
|
|
// ID stack/scopes
|
|
// Read the FAQ (docs/FAQ.md or http://dearimgui.org/faq) for more details about how ID are handled in dear imgui.
|
|
// - Those questions are answered and impacted by understanding of the ID stack system:
|
|
// - "Q: Why is my widget not reacting when I click on it?"
|
|
// - "Q: How can I have widgets with an empty label?"
|
|
// - "Q: How can I have multiple widgets with the same label?"
|
|
// - Short version: ID are hashes of the entire ID stack. If you are creating widgets in a loop you most likely
|
|
// want to push a unique identifier (e.g. object pointer, loop index) to uniquely differentiate them.
|
|
// - You can also use the "Label##foobar" syntax within widget label to distinguish them from each others.
|
|
// - In this header file we use the "label"/"name" terminology to denote a string that will be displayed + used as an ID,
|
|
// whereas "str_id" denote a string that is only used as an ID and not normally displayed.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushID(const char* str_id); // push string into the ID stack (will hash string).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end); // push string into the ID stack (will hash string).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushID(const void* ptr_id); // push pointer into the ID stack (will hash pointer).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushID(int int_id); // push integer into the ID stack (will hash integer).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopID(); // pop from the ID stack.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const char* str_id); // calculate unique ID (hash of whole ID stack + given parameter). e.g. if you want to query into ImGuiStorage yourself
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const void* ptr_id);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Text
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextUnformatted(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // raw text without formatting. Roughly equivalent to Text("%s", text) but: A) doesn't require null terminated string if 'text_end' is specified, B) it's faster, no memory copy is done, no buffer size limits, recommended for long chunks of text.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Text(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // formatted text
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextColored(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // shortcut for PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col); Text(fmt, ...); PopStyleColor();
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextDisabled(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]); Text(fmt, ...); PopStyleColor();
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextDisabledV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextWrapped(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for PushTextWrapPos(0.0f); Text(fmt, ...); PopTextWrapPos();. Note that this won't work on an auto-resizing window if there's no other widgets to extend the window width, yoy may need to set a size using SetNextWindowSize().
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextWrappedV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void LabelText(const char* label, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // display text+label aligned the same way as value+label widgets
|
|
IMGUI_API void LabelTextV(const char* label, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API void BulletText(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for Bullet()+Text()
|
|
IMGUI_API void BulletTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Main
|
|
// - Most widgets return true when the value has been changed or when pressed/selected
|
|
// - You may also use one of the many IsItemXXX functions (e.g. IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.) to query widget state.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // button
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SmallButton(const char* label); // button with FramePadding=(0,0) to easily embed within text
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); // flexible button behavior without the visuals, frequently useful to build custom behaviors using the public api (along with IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ArrowButton(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir); // square button with an arrow shape
|
|
IMGUI_API void Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1,1), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1,1,1,1), const ImVec4& border_col = ImVec4(0,0,0,0));
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1,1), int frame_padding = -1, const ImVec4& bg_col = ImVec4(0,0,0,0), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1,1,1,1)); // <0 frame_padding uses default frame padding settings. 0 for no padding
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char* label, int* flags, int flags_value);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool RadioButton(const char* label, bool active); // use with e.g. if (RadioButton("one", my_value==1)) { my_value = 1; }
|
|
IMGUI_API bool RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, int v_button); // shortcut to handle the above pattern when value is an integer
|
|
IMGUI_API void ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg = ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0), const char* overlay = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Bullet(); // draw a small circle + keep the cursor on the same line. advance cursor x position by GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing(), same distance that TreeNode() uses
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Combo Box
|
|
// - The BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() items.
|
|
// - The old Combo() api are helpers over BeginCombo()/EndCombo() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analogous to how ListBox are created.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndCombo(); // only call EndCombo() if BeginCombo() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1); // Separate items with \0 within a string, end item-list with \0\0. e.g. "One\0Two\0Three\0"
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool(*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Drag Sliders
|
|
// - CTRL+Click on any drag box to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp.
|
|
// - For all the Float2/Float3/Float4/Int2/Int3/Int4 versions of every functions, note that a 'float v[X]' function argument is the same as 'float* v',
|
|
// the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. You can pass address of your first element out of a contiguous set, e.g. &myvector.x
|
|
// - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
|
|
// - Format string may also be set to NULL or use the default format ("%f" or "%d").
|
|
// - Speed are per-pixel of mouse movement (v_speed=0.2f: mouse needs to move by 5 pixels to increase value by 1). For gamepad/keyboard navigation, minimum speed is Max(v_speed, minimum_step_at_given_precision).
|
|
// - Use v_min < v_max to clamp edits to given limits. Note that CTRL+Click manual input can override those limits if ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is not used.
|
|
// - Use v_max = FLT_MAX / INT_MAX etc to avoid clamping to a maximum, same with v_min = -FLT_MAX / INT_MIN to avoid clamping to a minimum.
|
|
// - We use the same sets of flags for DragXXX() and SliderXXX() functions as the features are the same and it makes it easier to swap them.
|
|
// - Legacy: Pre-1.78 there are DragXXX() function signatures that takes a final `float power=1.0f' argument instead of the `ImGuiSliderFlags flags=0' argument.
|
|
// If you get a warning converting a float to ImGuiSliderFlags, read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", const char* format_max = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragInt(const char* label, int* v, float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", const char* format_max = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed = 1.0f, const void* p_min = NULL, const void* p_max = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed = 1.0f, const void* p_min = NULL, const void* p_max = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Regular Sliders
|
|
// - CTRL+Click on any slider to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp.
|
|
// - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
|
|
// - Format string may also be set to NULL or use the default format ("%f" or "%d").
|
|
// - Legacy: Pre-1.78 there are SliderXXX() function signatures that takes a final `float power=1.0f' argument instead of the `ImGuiSliderFlags flags=0' argument.
|
|
// If you get a warning converting a float to ImGuiSliderFlags, read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // adjust format to decorate the value with a prefix or a suffix for in-slider labels or unit display.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min = -360.0f, float v_degrees_max = +360.0f, const char* format = "%.0f deg", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Input with Keyboard
|
|
// - If you want to use InputText() with std::string or any custom dynamic string type, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h and comments in imgui_demo.cpp.
|
|
// - Most of the ImGuiInputTextFlags flags are only useful for InputText() and not for InputFloatX, InputIntX, InputDouble etc.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputTextWithHint(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step = 0.0f, float step_fast = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step = 1, int step_fast = 100, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step = 0.0, double step_fast = 0.0, const char* format = "%.6f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_step = NULL, const void* p_step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_step = NULL, const void* p_step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Color Editor/Picker (tip: the ColorEdit* functions have a little color square that can be left-clicked to open a picker, and right-clicked to open an option menu.)
|
|
// - Note that in C++ a 'float v[X]' function argument is the _same_ as 'float* v', the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible.
|
|
// - You can pass the address of a first float element out of a contiguous structure, e.g. &myvector.x
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, const float* ref_col = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // display a color square/button, hover for details, return true when pressed.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags); // initialize current options (generally on application startup) if you want to select a default format, picker type, etc. User will be able to change many settings, unless you pass the _NoOptions flag to your calls.
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Trees
|
|
// - TreeNode functions return true when the node is open, in which case you need to also call TreePop() when you are finished displaying the tree node contents.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const char* label);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // helper variation to easily decorelate the id from the displayed string. Read the FAQ about why and how to use ID. to align arbitrary text at the same level as a TreeNode() you can use Bullet().
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // "
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TreePush(const char* str_id); // ~ Indent()+PushId(). Already called by TreeNode() when returning true, but you can call TreePush/TreePop yourself if desired.
|
|
IMGUI_API void TreePush(const void* ptr_id = NULL); // "
|
|
IMGUI_API void TreePop(); // ~ Unindent()+PopId()
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing(); // horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode*() or Bullet() == (g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x*2) for a regular unframed TreeNode
|
|
IMGUI_API bool CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // if returning 'true' the header is open. doesn't indent nor push on ID stack. user doesn't have to call TreePop().
|
|
IMGUI_API bool CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_visible, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // when 'p_visible != NULL': if '*p_visible==true' display an additional small close button on upper right of the header which will set the bool to false when clicked, if '*p_visible==false' don't display the header.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextItemOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state.
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Selectables
|
|
// - A selectable highlights when hovered, and can display another color when selected.
|
|
// - Neighbors selectable extend their highlight bounds in order to leave no gap between them. This is so a series of selected Selectable appear contiguous.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Selectable(const char* label, bool selected = false, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // "bool selected" carry the selection state (read-only). Selectable() is clicked is returns true so you can modify your selection state. size.x==0.0: use remaining width, size.x>0.0: specify width. size.y==0.0: use label height, size.y>0.0: specify height
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // "bool* p_selected" point to the selection state (read-write), as a convenient helper.
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: List Boxes
|
|
// - This is essentially a thin wrapper to using BeginChild/EndChild with some stylistic changes.
|
|
// - The BeginListBox()/EndListBox() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() or any items.
|
|
// - The simplified/old ListBox() api are helpers over BeginListBox()/EndListBox() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analoguous to how Combos are created.
|
|
// - Choose frame width: size.x > 0.0f: custom / size.x < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: right-align / size.x = 0.0f (default): use current ItemWidth
|
|
// - Choose frame height: size.y > 0.0f: custom / size.y < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: bottom-align / size.y = 0.0f (default): arbitrary default height which can fit ~7 items
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // open a framed scrolling region
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndListBox(); // only call EndListBox() if BeginListBox() returned true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Data Plotting
|
|
// - Consider using ImPlot (https://github.com/epezent/implot) which is much better!
|
|
IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float));
|
|
IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
|
|
IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float));
|
|
IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Value() Helpers.
|
|
// - Those are merely shortcut to calling Text() with a format string. Output single value in "name: value" format (tip: freely declare more in your code to handle your types. you can add functions to the ImGui namespace)
|
|
IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, bool b);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, int v);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format = NULL);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Menus
|
|
// - Use BeginMenuBar() on a window ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar to append to its menu bar.
|
|
// - Use BeginMainMenuBar() to create a menu bar at the top of the screen and append to it.
|
|
// - Use BeginMenu() to create a menu. You can call BeginMenu() multiple time with the same identifier to append more items to it.
|
|
// - Not that MenuItem() keyboardshortcuts are displayed as a convenience but _not processed_ by Dear ImGui at the moment.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginMenuBar(); // append to menu-bar of current window (requires ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar flag set on parent window).
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndMenuBar(); // only call EndMenuBar() if BeginMenuBar() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginMainMenuBar(); // create and append to a full screen menu-bar.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndMainMenuBar(); // only call EndMainMenuBar() if BeginMainMenuBar() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginMenu(const char* label, bool enabled = true); // create a sub-menu entry. only call EndMenu() if this returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndMenu(); // only call EndMenu() if BeginMenu() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut = NULL, bool selected = false, bool enabled = true); // return true when activated.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled = true); // return true when activated + toggle (*p_selected) if p_selected != NULL
|
|
|
|
// Tooltips
|
|
// - Tooltip are windows following the mouse. They do not take focus away.
|
|
IMGUI_API void BeginTooltip(); // begin/append a tooltip window. to create full-featured tooltip (with any kind of items).
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndTooltip();
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // set a text-only tooltip, typically use with ImGui::IsItemHovered(). override any previous call to SetTooltip().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
|
|
// Popups, Modals
|
|
// - They block normal mouse hovering detection (and therefore most mouse interactions) behind them.
|
|
// - If not modal: they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
|
|
// - Their visibility state (~bool) is held internally instead of being held by the programmer as we are used to with regular Begin*() calls.
|
|
// - The 3 properties above are related: we need to retain popup visibility state in the library because popups may be closed as any time.
|
|
// - You can bypass the hovering restriction by using ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup when calling IsItemHovered() or IsWindowHovered().
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID stack, so OpenPopup and BeginPopup generally needs to be at the same level of the stack.
|
|
// This is sometimes leading to confusing mistakes. May rework this in the future.
|
|
|
|
// Popups: begin/end functions
|
|
// - BeginPopup(): query popup state, if open start appending into the window. Call EndPopup() afterwards. ImGuiWindowFlags are forwarded to the window.
|
|
// - BeginPopupModal(): block every interactions behind the window, cannot be closed by user, add a dimming background, has a title bar.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // return true if the popup is open, and you can start outputting to it.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // return true if the modal is open, and you can start outputting to it.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndPopup(); // only call EndPopup() if BeginPopupXXX() returns true!
|
|
|
|
// Popups: open/close functions
|
|
// - OpenPopup(): set popup state to open. ImGuiPopupFlags are available for opening options.
|
|
// - If not modal: they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
|
|
// - CloseCurrentPopup(): use inside the BeginPopup()/EndPopup() scope to close manually.
|
|
// - CloseCurrentPopup() is called by default by Selectable()/MenuItem() when activated (FIXME: need some options).
|
|
// - Use ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup to avoid opening a popup if there's already one at the same level. This is equivalent to e.g. testing for !IsAnyPopupOpen() prior to OpenPopup().
|
|
// - Use IsWindowAppearing() after BeginPopup() to tell if a window just opened.
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Notice that for OpenPopupOnItemClick() we exceptionally default flags to 1 (== ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight) for backward compatibility with older API taking 'int mouse_button = 1' parameter
|
|
IMGUI_API void OpenPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 0); // call to mark popup as open (don't call every frame!).
|
|
IMGUI_API void OpenPopup(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 0); // id overload to facilitate calling from nested stacks
|
|
IMGUI_API void OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // helper to open popup when clicked on last item. Default to ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight == 1. (note: actually triggers on the mouse _released_ event to be consistent with popup behaviors)
|
|
IMGUI_API void CloseCurrentPopup(); // manually close the popup we have begin-ed into.
|
|
|
|
// Popups: open+begin combined functions helpers
|
|
// - Helpers to do OpenPopup+BeginPopup where the Open action is triggered by e.g. hovering an item and right-clicking.
|
|
// - They are convenient to easily create context menus, hence the name.
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Notice that BeginPopupContextXXX takes ImGuiPopupFlags just like OpenPopup() and unlike BeginPopup(). For full consistency, we may add ImGuiWindowFlags to the BeginPopupContextXXX functions in the future.
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Notice that we exceptionally default their flags to 1 (== ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight) for backward compatibility with older API taking 'int mouse_button = 1' parameter, so if you add other flags remember to re-add the ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // open+begin popup when clicked on last item. Use str_id==NULL to associate the popup to previous item. If you want to use that on a non-interactive item such as Text() you need to pass in an explicit ID here. read comments in .cpp!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1);// open+begin popup when clicked on current window.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // open+begin popup when clicked in void (where there are no windows).
|
|
|
|
// Popups: query functions
|
|
// - IsPopupOpen(): return true if the popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack.
|
|
// - IsPopupOpen() with ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId: return true if any popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack.
|
|
// - IsPopupOpen() with ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId + ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel: return true if any popup is open.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags flags = 0); // return true if the popup is open.
|
|
|
|
// Tables
|
|
// - Full-featured replacement for old Columns API.
|
|
// - See Demo->Tables for demo code. See top of imgui_tables.cpp for general commentary.
|
|
// - See ImGuiTableFlags_ and ImGuiTableColumnFlags_ enums for a description of available flags.
|
|
// The typical call flow is:
|
|
// - 1. Call BeginTable(), early out if returning false.
|
|
// - 2. Optionally call TableSetupColumn() to submit column name/flags/defaults.
|
|
// - 3. Optionally call TableSetupScrollFreeze() to request scroll freezing of columns/rows.
|
|
// - 4. Optionally call TableHeadersRow() to submit a header row. Names are pulled from TableSetupColumn() data.
|
|
// - 5. Populate contents:
|
|
// - In most situations you can use TableNextRow() + TableSetColumnIndex(N) to start appending into a column.
|
|
// - If you are using tables as a sort of grid, where every columns is holding the same type of contents,
|
|
// you may prefer using TableNextColumn() instead of TableNextRow() + TableSetColumnIndex().
|
|
// TableNextColumn() will automatically wrap-around into the next row if needed.
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Comparatively to the old Columns() API, we need to call TableNextColumn() for the first column!
|
|
// - Summary of possible call flow:
|
|
// --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// TableNextRow() -> TableSetColumnIndex(0) -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableSetColumnIndex(1) -> Text("Hello 1") // OK
|
|
// TableNextRow() -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 1") // OK
|
|
// TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 1") // OK: TableNextColumn() automatically gets to next row!
|
|
// TableNextRow() -> Text("Hello 0") // Not OK! Missing TableSetColumnIndex() or TableNextColumn()! Text will not appear!
|
|
// --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// - 5. Call EndTable()
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginTable(const char* str_id, int column, ImGuiTableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), float inner_width = 0.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndTable(); // only call EndTable() if BeginTable() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags row_flags = 0, float min_row_height = 0.0f); // append into the first cell of a new row.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TableNextColumn(); // append into the next column (or first column of next row if currently in last column). Return true when column is visible.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TableSetColumnIndex(int column_n); // append into the specified column. Return true when column is visible.
|
|
|
|
// Tables: Headers & Columns declaration
|
|
// - Use TableSetupColumn() to specify label, resizing policy, default width/weight, id, various other flags etc.
|
|
// - Use TableHeadersRow() to create a header row and automatically submit a TableHeader() for each column.
|
|
// Headers are required to perform: reordering, sorting, and opening the context menu.
|
|
// The context menu can also be made available in columns body using ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody.
|
|
// - You may manually submit headers using TableNextRow() + TableHeader() calls, but this is only useful in
|
|
// some advanced use cases (e.g. adding custom widgets in header row).
|
|
// - Use TableSetupScrollFreeze() to lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled.
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableSetupColumn(const char* label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = 0, float init_width_or_weight = 0.0f, ImGuiID user_id = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableSetupScrollFreeze(int cols, int rows); // lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled.
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableHeadersRow(); // submit all headers cells based on data provided to TableSetupColumn() + submit context menu
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableHeader(const char* label); // submit one header cell manually (rarely used)
|
|
|
|
// Tables: Sorting & Miscellaneous functions
|
|
// - Sorting: call TableGetSortSpecs() to retrieve latest sort specs for the table. NULL when not sorting.
|
|
// When 'sort_specs->SpecsDirty == true' you should sort your data. It will be true when sorting specs have
|
|
// changed since last call, or the first time. Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting,
|
|
// else you may wastefully sort your data every frame!
|
|
// - Functions args 'int column_n' treat the default value of -1 as the same as passing the current column index.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSortSpecs* TableGetSortSpecs(); // get latest sort specs for the table (NULL if not sorting). Lifetime: don't hold on this pointer over multiple frames or past any subsequent call to BeginTable().
|
|
IMGUI_API int TableGetColumnCount(); // return number of columns (value passed to BeginTable)
|
|
IMGUI_API int TableGetColumnIndex(); // return current column index.
|
|
IMGUI_API int TableGetRowIndex(); // return current row index.
|
|
IMGUI_API const char* TableGetColumnName(int column_n = -1); // return "" if column didn't have a name declared by TableSetupColumn(). Pass -1 to use current column.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiTableColumnFlags TableGetColumnFlags(int column_n = -1); // return column flags so you can query their Enabled/Visible/Sorted/Hovered status flags. Pass -1 to use current column.
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableSetColumnEnabled(int column_n, bool v);// change user accessible enabled/disabled state of a column. Set to false to hide the column. User can use the context menu to change this themselves (right-click in headers, or right-click in columns body with ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody)
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget target, ImU32 color, int column_n = -1); // change the color of a cell, row, or column. See ImGuiTableBgTarget_ flags for details.
|
|
|
|
// Legacy Columns API (prefer using Tables!)
|
|
// - You can also use SameLine(pos_x) to mimic simplified columns.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Columns(int count = 1, const char* id = NULL, bool border = true);
|
|
IMGUI_API void NextColumn(); // next column, defaults to current row or next row if the current row is finished
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetColumnIndex(); // get current column index
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetColumnWidth(int column_index = -1); // get column width (in pixels). pass -1 to use current column
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width); // set column width (in pixels). pass -1 to use current column
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetColumnOffset(int column_index = -1); // get position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use current column, otherwise 0..GetColumnsCount() inclusive. column 0 is typically 0.0f
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset_x); // set position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use current column
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetColumnsCount();
|
|
|
|
// Tab Bars, Tabs
|
|
// Note: Tabs are automatically created by the docking system. Use this to create tab bars/tabs yourself without docking being involved.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags = 0); // create and append into a TabBar
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndTabBar(); // only call EndTabBar() if BeginTabBar() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginTabItem(const char* label, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0); // create a Tab. Returns true if the Tab is selected.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndTabItem(); // only call EndTabItem() if BeginTabItem() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TabItemButton(const char* label, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0); // create a Tab behaving like a button. return true when clicked. cannot be selected in the tab bar.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetTabItemClosed(const char* tab_or_docked_window_label); // notify TabBar or Docking system of a closed tab/window ahead (useful to reduce visual flicker on reorderable tab bars). For tab-bar: call after BeginTabBar() and before Tab submissions. Otherwise call with a window name.
|
|
|
|
// Docking
|
|
// [BETA API] Enable with io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable.
|
|
// Note: You can use most Docking facilities without calling any API. You DO NOT need to call DockSpace() to use Docking!
|
|
// - Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock. Hold SHIFT to disable docking/undocking.
|
|
// - Drag from window menu button (upper-left button) to undock an entire node (all windows).
|
|
// - When io.ConfigDockingWithShift == true, you instead need to hold SHIFT to _enable_ docking/undocking.
|
|
// About dockspaces:
|
|
// - Use DockSpace() to create an explicit dock node _within_ an existing window. See Docking demo for details.
|
|
// - Use DockSpaceOverViewport() to create an explicit dock node covering the screen or a specific viewport.
|
|
// This is often used with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode.
|
|
// - Important: Dockspaces need to be submitted _before_ any window they can host. Submit it early in your frame!
|
|
// - Important: Dockspaces need to be kept alive if hidden, otherwise windows docked into it will be undocked.
|
|
// e.g. if you have multiple tabs with a dockspace inside each tab: submit the non-visible dockspaces with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID DockSpace(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiDockNodeFlags flags = 0, const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID DockSpaceOverViewport(const ImGuiViewport* viewport = NULL, ImGuiDockNodeFlags flags = 0, const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowDockID(ImGuiID dock_id, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window dock id
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowClass(const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class); // set next window class (control docking compatibility + provide hints to platform backend via custom viewport flags and platform parent/child relationship)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetWindowDockID();
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowDocked(); // is current window docked into another window?
|
|
|
|
// Logging/Capture
|
|
// - All text output from the interface can be captured into tty/file/clipboard. By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging.
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogToTTY(int auto_open_depth = -1); // start logging to tty (stdout)
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogToFile(int auto_open_depth = -1, const char* filename = NULL); // start logging to file
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogToClipboard(int auto_open_depth = -1); // start logging to OS clipboard
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogFinish(); // stop logging (close file, etc.)
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogButtons(); // helper to display buttons for logging to tty/file/clipboard
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogText(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // pass text data straight to log (without being displayed)
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
|
|
// Drag and Drop
|
|
// - On source items, call BeginDragDropSource(), if it returns true also call SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource().
|
|
// - On target candidates, call BeginDragDropTarget(), if it returns true also call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget().
|
|
// - If you stop calling BeginDragDropSource() the payload is preserved however it won't have a preview tooltip (we currently display a fallback "..." tooltip, see #1725)
|
|
// - An item can be both drag source and drop target.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // call after submitting an item which may be dragged. when this return true, you can call SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource()
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t sz, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // type is a user defined string of maximum 32 characters. Strings starting with '_' are reserved for dear imgui internal types. Data is copied and held by imgui. Return true when payload has been accepted.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndDragDropSource(); // only call EndDragDropSource() if BeginDragDropSource() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropTarget(); // call after submitting an item that may receive a payload. If this returns true, you can call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget()
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // accept contents of a given type. If ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery is set you can peek into the payload before the mouse button is released.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndDragDropTarget(); // only call EndDragDropTarget() if BeginDragDropTarget() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* GetDragDropPayload(); // peek directly into the current payload from anywhere. may return NULL. use ImGuiPayload::IsDataType() to test for the payload type.
|
|
|
|
// Disabling [BETA API]
|
|
// - Disable all user interactions and dim items visuals (applying style.DisabledAlpha over current colors)
|
|
// - Those can be nested but it cannot be used to enable an already disabled section (a single BeginDisabled(true) in the stack is enough to keep everything disabled)
|
|
// - BeginDisabled(false) essentially does nothing useful but is provided to facilitate use of boolean expressions. If you can avoid calling BeginDisabled(False)/EndDisabled() best to avoid it.
|
|
IMGUI_API void BeginDisabled(bool disabled = true);
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndDisabled();
|
|
|
|
// Inertial scroll
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsInertialScroll();
|
|
IMGUI_API bool WasInertialScroll();
|
|
IMGUI_API void InhibitInertialScroll();
|
|
|
|
// Clipping
|
|
// - Mouse hovering is affected by ImGui::PushClipRect() calls, unlike direct calls to ImDrawList::PushClipRect() which are render only.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopClipRect();
|
|
|
|
// Focus, Activation
|
|
// - Prefer using "SetItemDefaultFocus()" over "if (IsWindowAppearing()) SetScrollHereY()" when applicable to signify "this is the default item"
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetItemDefaultFocus(); // make last item the default focused item of a window.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset = 0); // focus keyboard on the next widget. Use positive 'offset' to access sub components of a multiple component widget. Use -1 to access previous widget.
|
|
|
|
// Item/Widgets Utilities and Query Functions
|
|
// - Most of the functions are referring to the previous Item that has been submitted.
|
|
// - See Demo Window under "Widgets->Querying Status" for an interactive visualization of most of those functions.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags = 0); // is the last item hovered? (and usable, aka not blocked by a popup, etc.). See ImGuiHoveredFlags for more options.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemActive(); // is the last item active? (e.g. button being held, text field being edited. This will continuously return true while holding mouse button on an item. Items that don't interact will always return false)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemFocused(); // is the last item focused for keyboard/gamepad navigation?
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton mouse_button = 0); // is the last item hovered and mouse clicked on? (**) == IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered()Important. (**) this it NOT equivalent to the behavior of e.g. Button(). Read comments in function definition.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemVisible(); // is the last item visible? (items may be out of sight because of clipping/scrolling)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemEdited(); // did the last item modify its underlying value this frame? or was pressed? This is generally the same as the "bool" return value of many widgets.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemActivated(); // was the last item just made active (item was previously inactive).
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemDeactivated(); // was the last item just made inactive (item was previously active). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that requires continuous editing.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); // was the last item just made inactive and made a value change when it was active? (e.g. Slider/Drag moved). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that requires continuous editing. Note that you may get false positives (some widgets such as Combo()/ListBox()/Selectable() will return true even when clicking an already selected item).
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemToggledOpen(); // was the last item open state toggled? set by TreeNode().
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemHovered(); // is any item hovered?
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemActive(); // is any item active?
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemFocused(); // is any item focused?
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMin(); // get upper-left bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMax(); // get lower-right bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectSize(); // get size of last item
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetItemAllowOverlap(); // allow last item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. sometimes useful with invisible buttons, selectables, etc. to catch unused area.
|
|
|
|
// Viewports
|
|
// - Currently represents the Platform Window created by the application which is hosting our Dear ImGui windows.
|
|
// - In 'docking' branch with multi-viewport enabled, we extend this concept to have multiple active viewports.
|
|
// - In the future we will extend this concept further to also represent Platform Monitor and support a "no main platform window" operation mode.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport* GetMainViewport(); // return primary/default viewport. This can never be NULL.
|
|
|
|
// Background/Foreground Draw Lists
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetBackgroundDrawList(); // get background draw list for the viewport associated to the current window. this draw list will be the first rendering one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text behind dear imgui contents.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetForegroundDrawList(); // get foreground draw list for the viewport associated to the current window. this draw list will be the last rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text over dear imgui contents.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetBackgroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport); // get background draw list for the given viewport. this draw list will be the first rendering one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text behind dear imgui contents.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetForegroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport); // get foreground draw list for the given viewport. this draw list will be the last rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text over dear imgui contents.
|
|
|
|
// Miscellaneous Utilities
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size); // test if rectangle (of given size, starting from cursor position) is visible / not clipped.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max); // test if rectangle (in screen space) is visible / not clipped. to perform coarse clipping on user's side.
|
|
IMGUI_API double GetTime(); // get global imgui time. incremented by io.DeltaTime every frame.
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetFrameCount(); // get global imgui frame count. incremented by 1 every frame.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawListSharedData* GetDrawListSharedData(); // you may use this when creating your own ImDrawList instances.
|
|
IMGUI_API const char* GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx); // get a string corresponding to the enum value (for display, saving, etc.).
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* storage); // replace current window storage with our own (if you want to manipulate it yourself, typically clear subsection of it)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiStorage* GetStateStorage();
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndChildFrame(); // always call EndChildFrame() regardless of BeginChildFrame() return values (which indicates a collapsed/clipped window)
|
|
|
|
// Text Utilities
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_double_hash = false, float wrap_width = -1.0f);
|
|
|
|
// Color Utilities
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec4 ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImU32 ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(const ImVec4& in);
|
|
IMGUI_API void ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float& out_h, float& out_s, float& out_v);
|
|
IMGUI_API void ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(float h, float s, float v, float& out_r, float& out_g, float& out_b);
|
|
|
|
// Inputs Utilities: Keyboard
|
|
// Without IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO: (legacy support)
|
|
// - For 'ImGuiKey key' you can still use your legacy native/user indices according to how your backend/engine stored them in io.KeysDown[].
|
|
// With IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO: (this is the way forward)
|
|
// - Any use of 'ImGuiKey' will assert when key < 512 will be passed, previously reserved as native/user keys indices
|
|
// - GetKeyIndex() is pass-through and therefore deprecated (gone if IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key); // is key being held.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat = true); // was key pressed (went from !Down to Down)? if repeat=true, uses io.KeyRepeatDelay / KeyRepeatRate
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key); // was key released (went from Down to !Down)?
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetKeyPressedAmount(ImGuiKey key, float repeat_delay, float rate); // uses provided repeat rate/delay. return a count, most often 0 or 1 but might be >1 if RepeatRate is small enough that DeltaTime > RepeatRate
|
|
IMGUI_API const char* GetKeyName(ImGuiKey key); // [DEBUG] returns English name of the key. Those names a provided for debugging purpose and are not meant to be saved persistently not compared.
|
|
IMGUI_API void CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool want_capture_keyboard_value = true); // attention: misleading name! manually override io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag next frame (said flag is entirely left for your application to handle). e.g. force capture keyboard when your widget is being hovered. This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureKeyboard = want_capture_keyboard_value"; after the next NewFrame() call.
|
|
|
|
// Inputs Utilities: Mouse
|
|
// - To refer to a mouse button, you may use named enums in your code e.g. ImGuiMouseButton_Left, ImGuiMouseButton_Right.
|
|
// - You can also use regular integer: it is forever guaranteed that 0=Left, 1=Right, 2=Middle.
|
|
// - Dragging operations are only reported after mouse has moved a certain distance away from the initial clicking position (see 'lock_threshold' and 'io.MouseDraggingThreshold')
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button); // is mouse button held?
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, bool repeat = false); // did mouse button clicked? (went from !Down to Down). Same as GetMouseClickedCount() == 1.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button); // did mouse button released? (went from Down to !Down)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button); // did mouse button double-clicked? Same as GetMouseClickedCount() == 2. (note that a double-click will also report IsMouseClicked() == true)
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetMouseClickedCount(ImGuiMouseButton button); // return the number of successive mouse-clicks at the time where a click happen (otherwise 0).
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip = true);// is mouse hovering given bounding rect (in screen space). clipped by current clipping settings, but disregarding of other consideration of focus/window ordering/popup-block.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos = NULL); // by convention we use (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote that there is no mouse available
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyMouseDown(); // [WILL OBSOLETE] is any mouse button held? This was designed for backends, but prefer having backend maintain a mask of held mouse buttons, because upcoming input queue system will make this invalid.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMousePos(); // shortcut to ImGui::GetIO().MousePos provided by user, to be consistent with other calls
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup(); // retrieve mouse position at the time of opening popup we have BeginPopup() into (helper to avoid user backing that value themselves)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // is mouse dragging? (if lock_threshold < -1.0f, uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button = 0, float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // return the delta from the initial clicking position while the mouse button is pressed or was just released. This is locked and return 0.0f until the mouse moves past a distance threshold at least once (if lock_threshold < -1.0f, uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold)
|
|
IMGUI_API void ResetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button = 0); //
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiMouseCursor GetMouseCursor(); // get desired cursor type, reset in ImGui::NewFrame(), this is updated during the frame. valid before Render(). If you use software rendering by setting io.MouseDrawCursor ImGui will render those for you
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type); // set desired cursor type
|
|
IMGUI_API void CaptureMouseFromApp(bool want_capture_mouse_value = true); // attention: misleading name! manually override io.WantCaptureMouse flag next frame (said flag is entirely left for your application to handle). This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureMouse = want_capture_mouse_value;" after the next NewFrame() call.
|
|
|
|
// Clipboard Utilities
|
|
// - Also see the LogToClipboard() function to capture GUI into clipboard, or easily output text data to the clipboard.
|
|
IMGUI_API const char* GetClipboardText();
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetClipboardText(const char* text);
|
|
|
|
// Settings/.Ini Utilities
|
|
// - The disk functions are automatically called if io.IniFilename != NULL (default is "imgui.ini").
|
|
// - Set io.IniFilename to NULL to load/save manually. Read io.WantSaveIniSettings description about handling .ini saving manually.
|
|
// - Important: default value "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir! Most apps will want to lock this to an absolute path (e.g. same path as executables).
|
|
IMGUI_API void LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame(). NewFrame() automatically calls LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(io.IniFilename).
|
|
IMGUI_API void LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size=0); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame() to provide .ini data from your own data source.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename); // this is automatically called (if io.IniFilename is not empty) a few seconds after any modification that should be reflected in the .ini file (and also by DestroyContext).
|
|
IMGUI_API const char* SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_ini_size = NULL); // return a zero-terminated string with the .ini data which you can save by your own mean. call when io.WantSaveIniSettings is set, then save data by your own mean and clear io.WantSaveIniSettings.
|
|
|
|
// Debug Utilities
|
|
IMGUI_API void DebugTextEncoding(const char* text);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(const char* version_str, size_t sz_io, size_t sz_style, size_t sz_vec2, size_t sz_vec4, size_t sz_drawvert, size_t sz_drawidx); // This is called by IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() macro.
|
|
|
|
// Memory Allocators
|
|
// - Those functions are not reliant on the current context.
|
|
// - DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions()
|
|
// for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for more details.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc free_func, void* user_data = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void GetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc* p_alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc* p_free_func, void** p_user_data);
|
|
IMGUI_API void* MemAlloc(size_t size);
|
|
IMGUI_API void MemFree(void* ptr);
|
|
|
|
// (Optional) Platform/OS interface for multi-viewport support
|
|
// Read comments around the ImGuiPlatformIO structure for more details.
|
|
// Note: You may use GetWindowViewport() to get the current viewport of the current window.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiPlatformIO& GetPlatformIO(); // platform/renderer functions, for backend to setup + viewports list.
|
|
IMGUI_API void UpdatePlatformWindows(); // call in main loop. will call CreateWindow/ResizeWindow/etc. platform functions for each secondary viewport, and DestroyWindow for each inactive viewport.
|
|
IMGUI_API void RenderPlatformWindowsDefault(void* platform_render_arg = NULL, void* renderer_render_arg = NULL); // call in main loop. will call RenderWindow/SwapBuffers platform functions for each secondary viewport which doesn't have the ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized flag set. May be reimplemented by user for custom rendering needs.
|
|
IMGUI_API void DestroyPlatformWindows(); // call DestroyWindow platform functions for all viewports. call from backend Shutdown() if you need to close platform windows before imgui shutdown. otherwise will be called by DestroyContext().
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport* FindViewportByID(ImGuiID id); // this is a helper for backends.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport* FindViewportByPlatformHandle(void* platform_handle); // this is a helper for backends. the type platform_handle is decided by the backend (e.g. HWND, MyWindow*, GLFWwindow* etc.)
|
|
|
|
} // namespace ImGui
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Flags & Enumerations
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::Begin()
|
|
enum ImGuiWindowFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar = 1 << 0, // Disable title-bar
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize = 1 << 1, // Disable user resizing with the lower-right grip
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove = 1 << 2, // Disable user moving the window
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar = 1 << 3, // Disable scrollbars (window can still scroll with mouse or programmatically)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse = 1 << 4, // Disable user vertically scrolling with mouse wheel. On child window, mouse wheel will be forwarded to the parent unless NoScrollbar is also set.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse = 1 << 5, // Disable user collapsing window by double-clicking on it. Also referred to as Window Menu Button (e.g. within a docking node).
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize = 1 << 6, // Resize every window to its content every frame
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground = 1 << 7, // Disable drawing background color (WindowBg, etc.) and outside border. Similar as using SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f).
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings = 1 << 8, // Never load/save settings in .ini file
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs = 1 << 9, // Disable catching mouse, hovering test with pass through.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar = 1 << 10, // Has a menu-bar
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar = 1 << 11, // Allow horizontal scrollbar to appear (off by default). You may use SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(width,0.0f)); prior to calling Begin() to specify width. Read code in imgui_demo in the "Horizontal Scrolling" section.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing = 1 << 12, // Disable taking focus when transitioning from hidden to visible state
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus = 1 << 13, // Disable bringing window to front when taking focus (e.g. clicking on it or programmatically giving it focus)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar= 1 << 14, // Always show vertical scrollbar (even if ContentSize.y < Size.y)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar=1<< 15, // Always show horizontal scrollbar (even if ContentSize.x < Size.x)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding = 1 << 16, // Ensure child windows without border uses style.WindowPadding (ignored by default for non-bordered child windows, because more convenient)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs = 1 << 18, // No gamepad/keyboard navigation within the window
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus = 1 << 19, // No focusing toward this window with gamepad/keyboard navigation (e.g. skipped by CTRL+TAB)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 20, // Display a dot next to the title. When used in a tab/docking context, tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking = 1 << 21, // Disable docking of this window
|
|
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse,
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened = 1 << 23, // [BETA] On child window: allow gamepad/keyboard navigation to cross over parent border to this child or between sibling child windows.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow = 1 << 24, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginChild()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip = 1 << 25, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginTooltip()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup = 1 << 26, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopup()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal = 1 << 27, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopupModal()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu = 1 << 28, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginMenu()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost = 1 << 29 // Don't use! For internal use by Begin()/NewFrame()
|
|
|
|
// [Obsolete]
|
|
//ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide = 1 << 17, // [Obsolete] --> Set io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges=true and make sure mouse cursors are supported by backend (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::InputText()
|
|
enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal = 1 << 0, // Allow 0123456789.+-*/
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal = 1 << 1, // Allow 0123456789ABCDEFabcdef
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase = 1 << 2, // Turn a..z into A..Z
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank = 1 << 3, // Filter out spaces, tabs
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll = 1 << 4, // Select entire text when first taking mouse focus
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue = 1 << 5, // Return 'true' when Enter is pressed (as opposed to every time the value was modified). Consider looking at the IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() function.
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion = 1 << 6, // Callback on pressing TAB (for completion handling)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory = 1 << 7, // Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows (for history handling)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways = 1 << 8, // Callback on each iteration. User code may query cursor position, modify text buffer.
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter = 1 << 9, // Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard.
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput = 1 << 10, // Pressing TAB input a '\t' character into the text field
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine = 1 << 11, // In multi-line mode, unfocus with Enter, add new line with Ctrl+Enter (default is opposite: unfocus with Ctrl+Enter, add line with Enter).
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll = 1 << 12, // Disable following the cursor horizontally
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite = 1 << 13, // Overwrite mode
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly = 1 << 14, // Read-only mode
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password = 1 << 15, // Password mode, display all characters as '*'
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_UndoRedo = 1 << 16, // Enable undo/redo. Note that input text owns the text data while active, if you want to provide your own undo/redo stack you need e.g. to call ClearActiveID().
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific = 1 << 17, // Allow 0123456789.+-*/eE (Scientific notation input)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize = 1 << 18, // Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow. Notify when the string wants to be resized (for string types which hold a cache of their Size). You will be provided a new BufSize in the callback and NEED to honor it. (see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example of using this)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit = 1 << 19 // Callback on any edit (note that InputText() already returns true on edit, the callback is useful mainly to manipulate the underlying buffer while focus is active)
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names (will be removed soon)
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
, ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite // [renamed in 1.82] name was not matching behavior
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::TreeNodeEx(), ImGui::CollapsingHeader*()
|
|
enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected = 1 << 0, // Draw as selected
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed = 1 << 1, // Draw frame with background (e.g. for CollapsingHeader)
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap = 1 << 2, // Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen = 1 << 3, // Don't do a TreePush() when open (e.g. for CollapsingHeader) = no extra indent nor pushing on ID stack
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog = 1 << 4, // Don't automatically and temporarily open node when Logging is active (by default logging will automatically open tree nodes)
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen = 1 << 5, // Default node to be open
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick = 1 << 6, // Need double-click to open node
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow = 1 << 7, // Only open when clicking on the arrow part. If ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick is also set, single-click arrow or double-click all box to open.
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf = 1 << 8, // No collapsing, no arrow (use as a convenience for leaf nodes).
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet = 1 << 9, // Display a bullet instead of arrow
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding = 1 << 10, // Use FramePadding (even for an unframed text node) to vertically align text baseline to regular widget height. Equivalent to calling AlignTextToFramePadding().
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth = 1 << 11, // Extend hit box to the right-most edge, even if not framed. This is not the default in order to allow adding other items on the same line. In the future we may refactor the hit system to be front-to-back, allowing natural overlaps and then this can become the default.
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth = 1 << 12, // Extend hit box to the left-most and right-most edges (bypass the indented area).
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere = 1 << 13, // (WIP) Nav: left direction may move to this TreeNode() from any of its child (items submitted between TreeNode and TreePop)
|
|
//ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoScrollOnOpen = 1 << 14, // FIXME: TODO: Disable automatic scroll on TreePop() if node got just open and contents is not visible
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(), IsPopupOpen() functions.
|
|
// - To be backward compatible with older API which took an 'int mouse_button = 1' argument, we need to treat
|
|
// small flags values as a mouse button index, so we encode the mouse button in the first few bits of the flags.
|
|
// It is therefore guaranteed to be legal to pass a mouse button index in ImGuiPopupFlags.
|
|
// - For the same reason, we exceptionally default the ImGuiPopupFlags argument of BeginPopupContextXXX functions to 1 instead of 0.
|
|
// IMPORTANT: because the default parameter is 1 (==ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight), if you rely on the default parameter
|
|
// and want to another another flag, you need to pass in the ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight flag.
|
|
// - Multiple buttons currently cannot be combined/or-ed in those functions (we could allow it later).
|
|
enum ImGuiPopupFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonLeft = 0, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Left Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 0 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Left)
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight = 1, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Right Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 1 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Right)
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMiddle = 2, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Middle Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 2 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Middle)
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_ = 0x1F,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonDefault_ = 1,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup = 1 << 5, // For OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(): don't open if there's already a popup at the same level of the popup stack
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems = 1 << 6, // For BeginPopupContextWindow(): don't return true when hovering items, only when hovering empty space
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId = 1 << 7, // For IsPopupOpen(): ignore the ImGuiID parameter and test for any popup.
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel = 1 << 8, // For IsPopupOpen(): search/test at any level of the popup stack (default test in the current level)
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopup = ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId | ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::Selectable()
|
|
enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups = 1 << 0, // Clicking this don't close parent popup window
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns = 1 << 1, // Selectable frame can span all columns (text will still fit in current column)
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick = 1 << 2, // Generate press events on double clicks too
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled = 1 << 3, // Cannot be selected, display grayed out text
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap = 1 << 4 // (WIP) Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginCombo()
|
|
enum ImGuiComboFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft = 1 << 0, // Align the popup toward the left by default
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall = 1 << 1, // Max ~4 items visible. Tip: If you want your combo popup to be a specific size you can use SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() prior to calling BeginCombo()
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular = 1 << 2, // Max ~8 items visible (default)
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge = 1 << 3, // Max ~20 items visible
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest = 1 << 4, // As many fitting items as possible
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton = 1 << 5, // Display on the preview box without the square arrow button
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview = 1 << 6, // Display only a square arrow button
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_ = ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabBar()
|
|
enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable = 1 << 0, // Allow manually dragging tabs to re-order them + New tabs are appended at the end of list
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs = 1 << 1, // Automatically select new tabs when they appear
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton = 1 << 2, // Disable buttons to open the tab list popup
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton = 1 << 3, // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false.
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons = 1 << 4, // Disable scrolling buttons (apply when fitting policy is ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll)
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 5, // Disable tooltips when hovering a tab
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown = 1 << 6, // Resize tabs when they don't fit
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll = 1 << 7, // Add scroll buttons when tabs don't fit
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown | ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll,
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_ = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabItem()
|
|
enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 0, // Display a dot next to the title + tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected = 1 << 1, // Trigger flag to programmatically make the tab selected when calling BeginTabItem()
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton = 1 << 2, // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false.
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId = 1 << 3, // Don't call PushID(tab->ID)/PopID() on BeginTabItem()/EndTabItem()
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 4, // Disable tooltip for the given tab
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder = 1 << 5, // Disable reordering this tab or having another tab cross over this tab
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading = 1 << 6, // Enforce the tab position to the left of the tab bar (after the tab list popup button)
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing = 1 << 7 // Enforce the tab position to the right of the tab bar (before the scrolling buttons)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginTable()
|
|
// - Important! Sizing policies have complex and subtle side effects, much more so than you would expect.
|
|
// Read comments/demos carefully + experiment with live demos to get acquainted with them.
|
|
// - The DEFAULT sizing policies are:
|
|
// - Default to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit if ScrollX is on, or if host window has ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize.
|
|
// - Default to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame if ScrollX is off.
|
|
// - When ScrollX is off:
|
|
// - Table defaults to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame -> all Columns defaults to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch with same weight.
|
|
// - Columns sizing policy allowed: Stretch (default), Fixed/Auto.
|
|
// - Fixed Columns (if any) will generally obtain their requested width (unless the table cannot fit them all).
|
|
// - Stretch Columns will share the remaining width according to their respective weight.
|
|
// - Mixed Fixed/Stretch columns is possible but has various side-effects on resizing behaviors.
|
|
// The typical use of mixing sizing policies is: any number of LEADING Fixed columns, followed by one or two TRAILING Stretch columns.
|
|
// (this is because the visible order of columns have subtle but necessary effects on how they react to manual resizing).
|
|
// - When ScrollX is on:
|
|
// - Table defaults to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit -> all Columns defaults to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed
|
|
// - Columns sizing policy allowed: Fixed/Auto mostly.
|
|
// - Fixed Columns can be enlarged as needed. Table will show an horizontal scrollbar if needed.
|
|
// - When using auto-resizing (non-resizable) fixed columns, querying the content width to use item right-alignment e.g. SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN) doesn't make sense, would create a feedback loop.
|
|
// - Using Stretch columns OFTEN DOES NOT MAKE SENSE if ScrollX is on, UNLESS you have specified a value for 'inner_width' in BeginTable().
|
|
// If you specify a value for 'inner_width' then effectively the scrolling space is known and Stretch or mixed Fixed/Stretch columns become meaningful again.
|
|
// - Read on documentation at the top of imgui_tables.cpp for details.
|
|
enum ImGuiTableFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
// Features
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable = 1 << 0, // Enable resizing columns.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable = 1 << 1, // Enable reordering columns in header row (need calling TableSetupColumn() + TableHeadersRow() to display headers)
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable = 1 << 2, // Enable hiding/disabling columns in context menu.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable = 1 << 3, // Enable sorting. Call TableGetSortSpecs() to obtain sort specs. Also see ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti and ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings = 1 << 4, // Disable persisting columns order, width and sort settings in the .ini file.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody = 1 << 5, // Right-click on columns body/contents will display table context menu. By default it is available in TableHeadersRow().
|
|
// Decorations
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg = 1 << 6, // Set each RowBg color with ImGuiCol_TableRowBg or ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt (equivalent of calling TableSetBgColor with ImGuiTableBgFlags_RowBg0 on each row manually)
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH = 1 << 7, // Draw horizontal borders between rows.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH = 1 << 8, // Draw horizontal borders at the top and bottom.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV = 1 << 9, // Draw vertical borders between columns.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV = 1 << 10, // Draw vertical borders on the left and right sides.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH, // Draw horizontal borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV, // Draw vertical borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH, // Draw inner borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH, // Draw outer borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Borders = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter, // Draw all borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody = 1 << 11, // [ALPHA] Disable vertical borders in columns Body (borders will always appears in Headers). -> May move to style
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize = 1 << 12, // [ALPHA] Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always appears in Headers). -> May move to style
|
|
// Sizing Policy (read above for defaults)
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit = 1 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthFixed or _WidthAuto (if resizable or not resizable), matching contents width.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame = 2 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthFixed or _WidthAuto (if resizable or not resizable), matching the maximum contents width of all columns. Implicitly enable ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp = 3 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthStretch with default weights proportional to each columns contents widths.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame = 4 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthStretch with default weights all equal, unless overridden by TableSetupColumn().
|
|
// Sizing Extra Options
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX = 1 << 16, // Make outer width auto-fit to columns, overriding outer_size.x value. Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY = 1 << 17, // Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit). Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible = 1 << 18, // Disable keeping column always minimally visible when ScrollX is off and table gets too small. Not recommended if columns are resizable.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths = 1 << 19, // Disable distributing remainder width to stretched columns (width allocation on a 100-wide table with 3 columns: Without this flag: 33,33,34. With this flag: 33,33,33). With larger number of columns, resizing will appear to be less smooth.
|
|
// Clipping
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip = 1 << 20, // Disable clipping rectangle for every individual columns (reduce draw command count, items will be able to overflow into other columns). Generally incompatible with TableSetupScrollFreeze().
|
|
// Padding
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX = 1 << 21, // Default if BordersOuterV is on. Enable outer-most padding. Generally desirable if you have headers.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX = 1 << 22, // Default if BordersOuterV is off. Disable outer-most padding.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX = 1 << 23, // Disable inner padding between columns (double inner padding if BordersOuterV is on, single inner padding if BordersOuterV is off).
|
|
// Scrolling
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX = 1 << 24, // Enable horizontal scrolling. Require 'outer_size' parameter of BeginTable() to specify the container size. Changes default sizing policy. Because this create a child window, ScrollY is currently generally recommended when using ScrollX.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY = 1 << 25, // Enable vertical scrolling. Require 'outer_size' parameter of BeginTable() to specify the container size.
|
|
// Sorting
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti = 1 << 26, // Hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1).
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate = 1 << 27, // Allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0).
|
|
// tildearrow
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInFrozenArea = 1 << 28, // Disable vertical borders in frozen area.
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Combinations and masks
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_ = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names (will be removed soon)
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
//, ImGuiTableFlags_ColumnsWidthFixed = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, ImGuiTableFlags_ColumnsWidthStretch = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame // WIP Tables 2020/12
|
|
//, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingPolicyFixed = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingPolicyStretch = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame // WIP Tables 2021/01
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::TableSetupColumn()
|
|
enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
// Input configuration flags
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled = 1 << 0, // Overriding/master disable flag: hide column, won't show in context menu (unlike calling TableSetColumnEnabled() which manipulates the user accessible state)
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide = 1 << 1, // Default as a hidden/disabled column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort = 1 << 2, // Default as a sorting column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch = 1 << 3, // Column will stretch. Preferable with horizontal scrolling disabled (default if table sizing policy is _SizingStretchSame or _SizingStretchProp).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed = 1 << 4, // Column will not stretch. Preferable with horizontal scrolling enabled (default if table sizing policy is _SizingFixedFit and table is resizable).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize = 1 << 5, // Disable manual resizing.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder = 1 << 6, // Disable manual reordering this column, this will also prevent other columns from crossing over this column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide = 1 << 7, // Disable ability to hide/disable this column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoClip = 1 << 8, // Disable clipping for this column (all NoClip columns will render in a same draw command).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort = 1 << 9, // Disable ability to sort on this field (even if ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable is set on the table).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending = 1 << 10, // Disable ability to sort in the ascending direction.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending = 1 << 11, // Disable ability to sort in the descending direction.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel = 1 << 12, // TableHeadersRow() will not submit label for this column. Convenient for some small columns. Name will still appear in context menu.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth = 1 << 13, // Disable header text width contribution to automatic column width.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending = 1 << 14, // Make the initial sort direction Ascending when first sorting on this column (default).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending = 1 << 15, // Make the initial sort direction Descending when first sorting on this column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable = 1 << 16, // Use current Indent value when entering cell (default for column 0).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable = 1 << 17, // Ignore current Indent value when entering cell (default for columns > 0). Indentation changes _within_ the cell will still be honored.
|
|
|
|
// Output status flags, read-only via TableGetColumnFlags()
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled = 1 << 24, // Status: is enabled == not hidden by user/api (referred to as "Hide" in _DefaultHide and _NoHide) flags.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible = 1 << 25, // Status: is visible == is enabled AND not clipped by scrolling.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted = 1 << 26, // Status: is currently part of the sort specs
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered = 1 << 27, // Status: is hovered by mouse
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Combinations and masks
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_ = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed,
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentMask_ = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable,
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_ = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered,
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_ = 1 << 30 // [Internal] Disable user resizing this column directly (it may however we resized indirectly from its left edge)
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names (will be removed soon)
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
//ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthAuto = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize, // Column will not stretch and keep resizing based on submitted contents.
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::TableNextRow()
|
|
enum ImGuiTableRowFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiTableRowFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers = 1 << 0 // Identify header row (set default background color + width of its contents accounted differently for auto column width)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enum for ImGui::TableSetBgColor()
|
|
// Background colors are rendering in 3 layers:
|
|
// - Layer 0: draw with RowBg0 color if set, otherwise draw with ColumnBg0 if set.
|
|
// - Layer 1: draw with RowBg1 color if set, otherwise draw with ColumnBg1 if set.
|
|
// - Layer 2: draw with CellBg color if set.
|
|
// The purpose of the two row/columns layers is to let you decide if a background color changes should override or blend with the existing color.
|
|
// When using ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg on the table, each row has the RowBg0 color automatically set for odd/even rows.
|
|
// If you set the color of RowBg0 target, your color will override the existing RowBg0 color.
|
|
// If you set the color of RowBg1 or ColumnBg1 target, your color will blend over the RowBg0 color.
|
|
enum ImGuiTableBgTarget_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiTableBgTarget_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0 = 1, // Set row background color 0 (generally used for background, automatically set when ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg is used)
|
|
ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg1 = 2, // Set row background color 1 (generally used for selection marking)
|
|
ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg = 3 // Set cell background color (top-most color)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::IsWindowFocused()
|
|
enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows = 1 << 0, // Return true if any children of the window is focused
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow = 1 << 1, // Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy)
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow = 1 << 2, // Return true if any window is focused. Important: If you are trying to tell how to dispatch your low-level inputs, do NOT use this. Use 'io.WantCaptureMouse' instead! Please read the FAQ!
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy = 1 << 3, // Do not consider popup hierarchy (do not treat popup emitter as parent of popup) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_DockHierarchy = 1 << 4, // Consider docking hierarchy (treat dockspace host as parent of docked window) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows = ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::IsItemHovered(), ImGui::IsWindowHovered()
|
|
// Note: if you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to Dear ImGui or to your app, you should use 'io.WantCaptureMouse' instead! Please read the FAQ!
|
|
// Note: windows with the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs flag are ignored by IsWindowHovered() calls.
|
|
enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_None = 0, // Return true if directly over the item/window, not obstructed by another window, not obstructed by an active popup or modal blocking inputs under them.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows = 1 << 0, // IsWindowHovered() only: Return true if any children of the window is hovered
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow = 1 << 1, // IsWindowHovered() only: Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy)
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow = 1 << 2, // IsWindowHovered() only: Return true if any window is hovered
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy = 1 << 3, // IsWindowHovered() only: Do not consider popup hierarchy (do not treat popup emitter as parent of popup) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy = 1 << 4, // IsWindowHovered() only: Consider docking hierarchy (treat dockspace host as parent of docked window) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup = 1 << 5, // Return true even if a popup window is normally blocking access to this item/window
|
|
//ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByModal = 1 << 6, // Return true even if a modal popup window is normally blocking access to this item/window. FIXME-TODO: Unavailable yet.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem = 1 << 7, // Return true even if an active item is blocking access to this item/window. Useful for Drag and Drop patterns.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped = 1 << 8, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the position is obstructed or overlapped by another window
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled = 1 << 9, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the item is disabled
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoNavOverride = 1 << 10, // Disable using gamepad/keyboard navigation state when active, always query mouse.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly = ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped,
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows = ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::DockSpace(), shared/inherited by child nodes.
|
|
// (Some flags can be applied to individual nodes directly)
|
|
// FIXME-DOCK: Also see ImGuiDockNodeFlagsPrivate_ which may involve using the WIP and internal DockBuilder api.
|
|
enum ImGuiDockNodeFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly = 1 << 0, // Shared // Don't display the dockspace node but keep it alive. Windows docked into this dockspace node won't be undocked.
|
|
//ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCentralNode = 1 << 1, // Shared // Disable Central Node (the node which can stay empty)
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode = 1 << 2, // Shared // Disable docking inside the Central Node, which will be always kept empty.
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode = 1 << 3, // Shared // Enable passthru dockspace: 1) DockSpace() will render a ImGuiCol_WindowBg background covering everything excepted the Central Node when empty. Meaning the host window should probably use SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f) prior to Begin() when using this. 2) When Central Node is empty: let inputs pass-through + won't display a DockingEmptyBg background. See demo for details.
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit = 1 << 4, // Shared/Local // Disable splitting the node into smaller nodes. Useful e.g. when embedding dockspaces into a main root one (the root one may have splitting disabled to reduce confusion). Note: when turned off, existing splits will be preserved.
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize = 1 << 5, // Shared/Local // Disable resizing node using the splitter/separators. Useful with programmatically setup dockspaces.
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar = 1 << 6, // Shared/Local // Tab bar will automatically hide when there is a single window in the dock node.
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoMove = 1 << 7 // Shared/Local // Disable moving node
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(), ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload()
|
|
enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_None = 0,
|
|
// BeginDragDropSource() flags
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip = 1 << 0, // By default, a successful call to BeginDragDropSource opens a tooltip so you can display a preview or description of the source contents. This flag disable this behavior.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover = 1 << 1, // By default, when dragging we clear data so that IsItemHovered() will return false, to avoid subsequent user code submitting tooltips. This flag disable this behavior so you can still call IsItemHovered() on the source item.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers = 1 << 2, // Disable the behavior that allows to open tree nodes and collapsing header by holding over them while dragging a source item.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID = 1 << 3, // Allow items such as Text(), Image() that have no unique identifier to be used as drag source, by manufacturing a temporary identifier based on their window-relative position. This is extremely unusual within the dear imgui ecosystem and so we made it explicit.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern = 1 << 4, // External source (from outside of dear imgui), won't attempt to read current item/window info. Will always return true. Only one Extern source can be active simultaneously.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload = 1 << 5, // Automatically expire the payload if the source cease to be submitted (otherwise payloads are persisting while being dragged)
|
|
// AcceptDragDropPayload() flags
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery = 1 << 10, // AcceptDragDropPayload() will returns true even before the mouse button is released. You can then call IsDelivery() to test if the payload needs to be delivered.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect = 1 << 11, // Do not draw the default highlight rectangle when hovering over target.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip = 1 << 12, // Request hiding the BeginDragDropSource tooltip from the BeginDragDropTarget site.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptPeekOnly = ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery | ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect // For peeking ahead and inspecting the payload before delivery.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Standard Drag and Drop payload types. You can define you own payload types using short strings. Types starting with '_' are defined by Dear ImGui.
|
|
#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F "_COL3F" // float[3]: Standard type for colors, without alpha. User code may use this type.
|
|
#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F "_COL4F" // float[4]: Standard type for colors. User code may use this type.
|
|
|
|
// A primary data type
|
|
enum ImGuiDataType_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiDataType_S8, // signed char / char (with sensible compilers)
|
|
ImGuiDataType_U8, // unsigned char
|
|
ImGuiDataType_S16, // short
|
|
ImGuiDataType_U16, // unsigned short
|
|
ImGuiDataType_S32, // int
|
|
ImGuiDataType_U32, // unsigned int
|
|
ImGuiDataType_S64, // long long / __int64
|
|
ImGuiDataType_U64, // unsigned long long / unsigned __int64
|
|
ImGuiDataType_Float, // float
|
|
ImGuiDataType_Double, // double
|
|
ImGuiDataType_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// A cardinal direction
|
|
enum ImGuiDir_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiDir_None = -1,
|
|
ImGuiDir_Left = 0,
|
|
ImGuiDir_Right = 1,
|
|
ImGuiDir_Up = 2,
|
|
ImGuiDir_Down = 3,
|
|
ImGuiDir_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// A sorting direction
|
|
enum ImGuiSortDirection_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiSortDirection_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending = 1, // Ascending = 0->9, A->Z etc.
|
|
ImGuiSortDirection_Descending = 2 // Descending = 9->0, Z->A etc.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
enum ImGuiKey_
|
|
{
|
|
// Keyboard
|
|
ImGuiKey_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Tab = 512, // == ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftArrow,
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightArrow,
|
|
ImGuiKey_UpArrow,
|
|
ImGuiKey_DownArrow,
|
|
ImGuiKey_PageUp,
|
|
ImGuiKey_PageDown,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Home,
|
|
ImGuiKey_End,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Insert,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Delete,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Backspace,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Space,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Enter,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Escape,
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl, ImGuiKey_LeftShift, ImGuiKey_LeftAlt, ImGuiKey_LeftSuper,
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightCtrl, ImGuiKey_RightShift, ImGuiKey_RightAlt, ImGuiKey_RightSuper,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Menu,
|
|
ImGuiKey_0, ImGuiKey_1, ImGuiKey_2, ImGuiKey_3, ImGuiKey_4, ImGuiKey_5, ImGuiKey_6, ImGuiKey_7, ImGuiKey_8, ImGuiKey_9,
|
|
ImGuiKey_A, ImGuiKey_B, ImGuiKey_C, ImGuiKey_D, ImGuiKey_E, ImGuiKey_F, ImGuiKey_G, ImGuiKey_H, ImGuiKey_I, ImGuiKey_J,
|
|
ImGuiKey_K, ImGuiKey_L, ImGuiKey_M, ImGuiKey_N, ImGuiKey_O, ImGuiKey_P, ImGuiKey_Q, ImGuiKey_R, ImGuiKey_S, ImGuiKey_T,
|
|
ImGuiKey_U, ImGuiKey_V, ImGuiKey_W, ImGuiKey_X, ImGuiKey_Y, ImGuiKey_Z,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F1, ImGuiKey_F2, ImGuiKey_F3, ImGuiKey_F4, ImGuiKey_F5, ImGuiKey_F6,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F7, ImGuiKey_F8, ImGuiKey_F9, ImGuiKey_F10, ImGuiKey_F11, ImGuiKey_F12,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Apostrophe, // '
|
|
ImGuiKey_Comma, // ,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Minus, // -
|
|
ImGuiKey_Period, // .
|
|
ImGuiKey_Slash, // /
|
|
ImGuiKey_Semicolon, // ;
|
|
ImGuiKey_Equal, // =
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftBracket, // [
|
|
ImGuiKey_Backslash, // \ (this text inhibit multiline comment caused by backslash)
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightBracket, // ]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GraveAccent, // `
|
|
ImGuiKey_CapsLock,
|
|
ImGuiKey_ScrollLock,
|
|
ImGuiKey_NumLock,
|
|
ImGuiKey_PrintScreen,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Pause,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad0, ImGuiKey_Keypad1, ImGuiKey_Keypad2, ImGuiKey_Keypad3, ImGuiKey_Keypad4,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad5, ImGuiKey_Keypad6, ImGuiKey_Keypad7, ImGuiKey_Keypad8, ImGuiKey_Keypad9,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadDecimal,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadDivide,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadMultiply,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadSubtract,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadAdd,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadEqual,
|
|
|
|
// Gamepad (some of those are analog values, 0.0f to 1.0f) // NAVIGATION action
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadStart, // Menu (Xbox) + (Switch) Start/Options (PS) // --
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadBack, // View (Xbox) - (Switch) Share (PS) // --
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp, // Y (Xbox) X (Switch) Triangle (PS) // -> ImGuiNavInput_Input
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown, // A (Xbox) B (Switch) Cross (PS) // -> ImGuiNavInput_Activate
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft, // X (Xbox) Y (Switch) Square (PS) // -> ImGuiNavInput_Menu
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight, // B (Xbox) A (Switch) Circle (PS) // -> ImGuiNavInput_Cancel
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, // D-pad Up // -> ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown, // D-pad Down // -> ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, // D-pad Left // -> ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, // D-pad Right // -> ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadL1, // L Bumper (Xbox) L (Switch) L1 (PS) // -> ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev + ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadR1, // R Bumper (Xbox) R (Switch) R1 (PS) // -> ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext + ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadL2, // L Trigger (Xbox) ZL (Switch) L2 (PS) [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadR2, // R Trigger (Xbox) ZR (Switch) R2 (PS) [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadL3, // L Thumbstick (Xbox) L3 (Switch) L3 (PS)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadR3, // R Thumbstick (Xbox) R3 (Switch) R3 (PS)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, // [Analog] // -> ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown, // [Analog] // -> ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, // [Analog] // -> ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, // [Analog] // -> ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickUp, // [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickDown, // [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickLeft, // [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickRight, // [Analog]
|
|
|
|
// Keyboard Modifiers (explicitly submitted by backend via AddKeyEvent() calls)
|
|
// - This is mirroring the data also written to io.KeyCtrl, io.KeyShift, io.KeyAlt, io.KeySuper, in a format allowing
|
|
// them to be accessed via standard key API, allowing calls such as IsKeyPressed(), IsKeyReleased(), querying duration etc.
|
|
// - Code polling every keys (e.g. an interface to detect a key press for input mapping) might want to ignore those
|
|
// and prefer using the real keys (e.g. ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl, ImGuiKey_RightCtrl instead of ImGuiKey_ModCtrl).
|
|
// - In theory the value of keyboard modifiers should be roughly equivalent to a logical or of the equivalent left/right keys.
|
|
// In practice: it's complicated; mods are often provided from different sources. Keyboard layout, IME, sticky keys and
|
|
// backends tend to interfere and break that equivalence. The safer decision is to relay that ambiguity down to the end-user...
|
|
ImGuiKey_ModCtrl, ImGuiKey_ModShift, ImGuiKey_ModAlt, ImGuiKey_ModSuper,
|
|
|
|
// End of list
|
|
ImGuiKey_COUNT, // No valid ImGuiKey is ever greater than this value
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Prior to 1.87 we required user to fill io.KeysDown[512] using their own native index + a io.KeyMap[] array.
|
|
// We are ditching this method but keeping a legacy path for user code doing e.g. IsKeyPressed(MY_NATIVE_KEY_CODE)
|
|
ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN = 512,
|
|
ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END = ImGuiKey_COUNT,
|
|
ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN,
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT, // Size of KeysData[]: only hold named keys
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN // First key stored in KeysData[0]
|
|
#else
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE = ImGuiKey_COUNT, // Size of KeysData[]: hold legacy 0..512 keycodes + named keys
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET = 0 // First key stored in KeysData[0]
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
, ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter = ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter // Renamed in 1.87
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper "flags" version of key-mods to store and compare multiple key-mods easily. Sometimes used for storage (e.g. io.KeyMods) but otherwise not much used in public API.
|
|
enum ImGuiModFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl = 1 << 0,
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_Shift = 1 << 1,
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_Alt = 1 << 2, // Menu
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_Super = 1 << 3 // Cmd/Super/Windows key
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Gamepad/Keyboard navigation
|
|
// Keyboard: Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard to enable. NewFrame() will automatically fill io.NavInputs[] based on your io.AddKeyEvent() calls.
|
|
// Gamepad: Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad to enable. Backend: set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad and fill the io.NavInputs[] fields before calling NewFrame(). Note that io.NavInputs[] is cleared by EndFrame().
|
|
// Read instructions in imgui.cpp for more details. Download PNG/PSD at http://dearimgui.org/controls_sheets.
|
|
enum ImGuiNavInput_
|
|
{
|
|
// Gamepad Mapping
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_Activate, // Activate / Open / Toggle / Tweak value // e.g. Cross (PS4), A (Xbox), A (Switch), Space (Keyboard)
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_Cancel, // Cancel / Close / Exit // e.g. Circle (PS4), B (Xbox), B (Switch), Escape (Keyboard)
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_Input, // Text input / On-Screen keyboard // e.g. Triang.(PS4), Y (Xbox), X (Switch), Return (Keyboard)
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_Menu, // Tap: Toggle menu / Hold: Focus, Move, Resize // e.g. Square (PS4), X (Xbox), Y (Switch), Alt (Keyboard)
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft, // Move / Tweak / Resize window (w/ PadMenu) // e.g. D-pad Left/Right/Up/Down (Gamepads), Arrow keys (Keyboard)
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight, //
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp, //
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown, //
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft, // Scroll / Move window (w/ PadMenu) // e.g. Left Analog Stick Left/Right/Up/Down
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight, //
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp, //
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown, //
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev, // Focus Next window (w/ PadMenu) // e.g. L1 or L2 (PS4), LB or LT (Xbox), L or ZL (Switch)
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext, // Focus Prev window (w/ PadMenu) // e.g. R1 or R2 (PS4), RB or RT (Xbox), R or ZL (Switch)
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow, // Slower tweaks // e.g. L1 or L2 (PS4), LB or LT (Xbox), L or ZL (Switch)
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast, // Faster tweaks // e.g. R1 or R2 (PS4), RB or RT (Xbox), R or ZL (Switch)
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Don't use directly! This is used internally to differentiate keyboard from gamepad inputs for behaviors that require to differentiate them.
|
|
// Keyboard behavior that have no corresponding gamepad mapping (e.g. CTRL+TAB) will be directly reading from keyboard keys instead of io.NavInputs[].
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_, // Move left // = Arrow keys
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_, // Move right
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_, // Move up
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_, // Move down
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Configuration flags stored in io.ConfigFlags. Set by user/application.
|
|
enum ImGuiConfigFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard = 1 << 0, // Master keyboard navigation enable flag. NewFrame() will automatically fill io.NavInputs[] based on io.AddKeyEvent() calls
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad = 1 << 1, // Master gamepad navigation enable flag. This is mostly to instruct your imgui backend to fill io.NavInputs[]. Backend also needs to set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos = 1 << 2, // Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. May be useful on TV/console systems where moving a virtual mouse is awkward. Will update io.MousePos and set io.WantSetMousePos=true. If enabled you MUST honor io.WantSetMousePos requests in your backend, otherwise ImGui will react as if the mouse is jumping around back and forth.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard = 1 << 3, // Instruct navigation to not set the io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag when io.NavActive is set.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse = 1 << 4, // Instruct imgui to clear mouse position/buttons in NewFrame(). This allows ignoring the mouse information set by the backend.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange = 1 << 5, // Instruct backend to not alter mouse cursor shape and visibility. Use if the backend cursor changes are interfering with yours and you don't want to use SetMouseCursor() to change mouse cursor. You may want to honor requests from imgui by reading GetMouseCursor() yourself instead.
|
|
|
|
// [BETA] Docking
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable = 1 << 6, // Docking enable flags.
|
|
|
|
// [CUSTOM] Inertial scroll
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_InertialScrollEnable = 1 << 7, // Docking enable flags.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NoHoverColors = 1 << 8, // Disable all "hovered" color changes (useful for mobile).
|
|
|
|
// [BETA] Viewports
|
|
// When using viewports it is recommended that your default value for ImGuiCol_WindowBg is opaque (Alpha=1.0) so transition to a viewport won't be noticeable.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable = 1 << 10, // Viewport enable flags (require both ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports + ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasViewports set by the respective backends)
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleViewports= 1 << 14, // [BETA: Don't use] FIXME-DPI: Reposition and resize imgui windows when the DpiScale of a viewport changed (mostly useful for the main viewport hosting other window). Note that resizing the main window itself is up to your application.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleFonts = 1 << 15, // [BETA: Don't use] FIXME-DPI: Request bitmap-scaled fonts to match DpiScale. This is a very low-quality workaround. The correct way to handle DPI is _currently_ to replace the atlas and/or fonts in the Platform_OnChangedViewport callback, but this is all early work in progress.
|
|
|
|
// User storage (to allow your backend/engine to communicate to code that may be shared between multiple projects. Those flags are not used by core Dear ImGui)
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_IsSRGB = 1 << 20, // Application is SRGB-aware.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_IsTouchScreen = 1 << 21 // Application is using a touch screen instead of a mouse.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Backend capabilities flags stored in io.BackendFlags. Set by imgui_impl_xxx or custom backend.
|
|
enum ImGuiBackendFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad = 1 << 0, // Backend Platform supports gamepad and currently has one connected.
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors = 1 << 1, // Backend Platform supports honoring GetMouseCursor() value to change the OS cursor shape.
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos = 1 << 2, // Backend Platform supports io.WantSetMousePos requests to reposition the OS mouse position (only used if ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos is set).
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset = 1 << 3, // Backend Renderer supports ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset. This enables output of large meshes (64K+ vertices) while still using 16-bit indices.
|
|
|
|
// [BETA] Viewports
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports = 1 << 10, // Backend Platform supports multiple viewports.
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport=1 << 11, // Backend Platform supports calling io.AddMouseViewportEvent() with the viewport under the mouse. IF POSSIBLE, ignore viewports with the ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs flag (Win32 backend, GLFW 3.30+ backend can do this, SDL backend cannot). If this cannot be done, Dear ImGui needs to use a flawed heuristic to find the viewport under.
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasViewports = 1 << 12 // Backend Renderer supports multiple viewports.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for PushStyleColor() / PopStyleColor()
|
|
enum ImGuiCol_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiCol_Text,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TextDisabled,
|
|
ImGuiCol_WindowBg, // Background of normal windows
|
|
ImGuiCol_ChildBg, // Background of child windows
|
|
ImGuiCol_PopupBg, // Background of popups, menus, tooltips windows
|
|
ImGuiCol_Border,
|
|
ImGuiCol_BorderShadow,
|
|
ImGuiCol_FrameBg, // Background of checkbox, radio button, plot, slider, text input
|
|
ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TitleBg,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed,
|
|
ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_CheckMark,
|
|
ImGuiCol_SliderGrab,
|
|
ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_Button,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ButtonActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_Header, // Header* colors are used for CollapsingHeader, TreeNode, Selectable, MenuItem
|
|
ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_HeaderActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_Separator,
|
|
ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_Tab,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TabHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TabActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_DockingPreview, // Preview overlay color when about to docking something
|
|
ImGuiCol_DockingEmptyBg, // Background color for empty node (e.g. CentralNode with no window docked into it)
|
|
ImGuiCol_PlotLines,
|
|
ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram,
|
|
ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg, // Table header background
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong, // Table outer and header borders (prefer using Alpha=1.0 here)
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight, // Table inner borders (prefer using Alpha=1.0 here)
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableRowBg, // Table row background (even rows)
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt, // Table row background (odd rows)
|
|
ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg,
|
|
ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget,
|
|
ImGuiCol_NavHighlight, // Gamepad/keyboard: current highlighted item
|
|
ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, // Highlight window when using CTRL+TAB
|
|
ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, // Darken/colorize entire screen behind the CTRL+TAB window list, when active
|
|
ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg, // Darken/colorize entire screen behind a modal window, when one is active
|
|
ImGuiCol_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for PushStyleVar() / PopStyleVar() to temporarily modify the ImGuiStyle structure.
|
|
// - The enum only refers to fields of ImGuiStyle which makes sense to be pushed/popped inside UI code.
|
|
// During initialization or between frames, feel free to just poke into ImGuiStyle directly.
|
|
// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _second column_ below to find the actual members and their description.
|
|
// In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
|
|
// With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
|
|
// - When changing this enum, you need to update the associated internal table GStyleVarInfo[] accordingly. This is where we link enum values to members offset/type.
|
|
enum ImGuiStyleVar_
|
|
{
|
|
// Enum name --------------------- // Member in ImGuiStyle structure (see ImGuiStyle for descriptions)
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, // float Alpha
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_DisabledAlpha, // float DisabledAlpha
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, // ImVec2 WindowPadding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, // float WindowRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize, // float WindowBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, // ImVec2 WindowMinSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign, // ImVec2 WindowTitleAlign
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, // float ChildRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, // float ChildBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding, // float PopupRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize, // float PopupBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, // ImVec2 FramePadding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding, // float FrameRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_FrameShading, // float FrameShading
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize, // float FrameBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, // ImVec2 ItemSpacing
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing, // ImVec2 ItemInnerSpacing
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing, // float IndentSpacing
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding, // ImVec2 CellPadding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize, // float ScrollbarSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding, // float ScrollbarRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, // float GrabMinSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding, // float GrabRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding, // float TabRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign, // ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, // ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for InvisibleButton() [extended in imgui_internal.h]
|
|
enum ImGuiButtonFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft = 1 << 0, // React on left mouse button (default)
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight = 1 << 1, // React on right mouse button
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle = 1 << 2, // React on center mouse button
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMask_ = ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle,
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonDefault_ = ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ColorEdit3() / ColorEdit4() / ColorPicker3() / ColorPicker4() / ColorButton()
|
|
enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha = 1 << 1, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: ignore Alpha component (will only read 3 components from the input pointer).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker = 1 << 2, // // ColorEdit: disable picker when clicking on color square.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions = 1 << 3, // // ColorEdit: disable toggling options menu when right-clicking on inputs/small preview.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview = 1 << 4, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable color square preview next to the inputs. (e.g. to show only the inputs)
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs = 1 << 5, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable inputs sliders/text widgets (e.g. to show only the small preview color square).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 6, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: disable tooltip when hovering the preview.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel = 1 << 7, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable display of inline text label (the label is still forwarded to the tooltip and picker).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview = 1 << 8, // // ColorPicker: disable bigger color preview on right side of the picker, use small color square preview instead.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop = 1 << 9, // // ColorEdit: disable drag and drop target. ColorButton: disable drag and drop source.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder = 1 << 10, // // ColorButton: disable border (which is enforced by default)
|
|
|
|
// User Options (right-click on widget to change some of them).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar = 1 << 16, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: show vertical alpha bar/gradient in picker.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview = 1 << 17, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: display preview as a transparent color over a checkerboard, instead of opaque.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf= 1 << 18, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: display half opaque / half checkerboard, instead of opaque.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR = 1 << 19, // // (WIP) ColorEdit: Currently only disable 0.0f..1.0f limits in RGBA edition (note: you probably want to use ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float flag as well).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB = 1 << 20, // [Display] // ColorEdit: override _display_ type among RGB/HSV/Hex. ColorPicker: select any combination using one or more of RGB/HSV/Hex.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV = 1 << 21, // [Display] // "
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex = 1 << 22, // [Display] // "
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 = 1 << 23, // [DataType] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: _display_ values formatted as 0..255.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float = 1 << 24, // [DataType] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: _display_ values formatted as 0.0f..1.0f floats instead of 0..255 integers. No round-trip of value via integers.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar = 1 << 25, // [Picker] // ColorPicker: bar for Hue, rectangle for Sat/Value.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel = 1 << 26, // [Picker] // ColorPicker: wheel for Hue, triangle for Sat/Value.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB = 1 << 27, // [Input] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: input and output data in RGB format.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV = 1 << 28, // [Input] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: input and output data in HSV format.
|
|
|
|
// Defaults Options. You can set application defaults using SetColorEditOptions(). The intent is that you probably don't want to
|
|
// override them in most of your calls. Let the user choose via the option menu and/or call SetColorEditOptions() once during startup.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar,
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Masks
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names (will be removed)
|
|
// ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex // [renamed in 1.69]
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for DragFloat(), DragInt(), SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc.
|
|
// We use the same sets of flags for DragXXX() and SliderXXX() functions as the features are the same and it makes it easier to swap them.
|
|
enum ImGuiSliderFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp = 1 << 4, // Clamp value to min/max bounds when input manually with CTRL+Click. By default CTRL+Click allows going out of bounds.
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic = 1 << 5, // Make the widget logarithmic (linear otherwise). Consider using ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat with this if using a format-string with small amount of digits.
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat = 1 << 6, // Disable rounding underlying value to match precision of the display format string (e.g. %.3f values are rounded to those 3 digits)
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput = 1 << 7, // Disable CTRL+Click or Enter key allowing to input text directly into the widget
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_ = 0x7000000F // [Internal] We treat using those bits as being potentially a 'float power' argument from the previous API that has got miscast to this enum, and will trigger an assert if needed.
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names (will be removed)
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
, ImGuiSliderFlags_ClampOnInput = ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp // [renamed in 1.79]
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Identify a mouse button.
|
|
// Those values are guaranteed to be stable and we frequently use 0/1 directly. Named enums provided for convenience.
|
|
enum ImGuiMouseButton_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiMouseButton_Left = 0,
|
|
ImGuiMouseButton_Right = 1,
|
|
ImGuiMouseButton_Middle = 2,
|
|
ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT = 5
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for GetMouseCursor()
|
|
// User code may request backend to display given cursor by calling SetMouseCursor(), which is why we have some cursors that are marked unused here
|
|
enum ImGuiMouseCursor_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_None = -1,
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow = 0,
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput, // When hovering over InputText, etc.
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll, // (Unused by Dear ImGui functions)
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS, // When hovering over an horizontal border
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW, // When hovering over a vertical border or a column
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW, // When hovering over the bottom-left corner of a window
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE, // When hovering over the bottom-right corner of a window
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand, // (Unused by Dear ImGui functions. Use for e.g. hyperlinks)
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed, // When hovering something with disallowed interaction. Usually a crossed circle.
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for ImGui::SetWindow***(), SetNextWindow***(), SetNextItem***() functions
|
|
// Represent a condition.
|
|
// Important: Treat as a regular enum! Do NOT combine multiple values using binary operators! All the functions above treat 0 as a shortcut to ImGuiCond_Always.
|
|
enum ImGuiCond_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiCond_None = 0, // No condition (always set the variable), same as _Always
|
|
ImGuiCond_Always = 1 << 0, // No condition (always set the variable)
|
|
ImGuiCond_Once = 1 << 1, // Set the variable once per runtime session (only the first call will succeed)
|
|
ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver = 1 << 2, // Set the variable if the object/window has no persistently saved data (no entry in .ini file)
|
|
ImGuiCond_Appearing = 1 << 3 // Set the variable if the object/window is appearing after being hidden/inactive (or the first time)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Helpers: Memory allocations macros, ImVector<>
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// IM_MALLOC(), IM_FREE(), IM_NEW(), IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(), IM_DELETE()
|
|
// We call C++ constructor on own allocated memory via the placement "new(ptr) Type()" syntax.
|
|
// Defining a custom placement new() with a custom parameter allows us to bypass including <new> which on some platforms complains when user has disabled exceptions.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
struct ImNewWrapper {};
|
|
inline void* operator new(size_t, ImNewWrapper, void* ptr) { return ptr; }
|
|
inline void operator delete(void*, ImNewWrapper, void*) {} // This is only required so we can use the symmetrical new()
|
|
#define IM_ALLOC(_SIZE) ImGui::MemAlloc(_SIZE)
|
|
#define IM_FREE(_PTR) ImGui::MemFree(_PTR)
|
|
#define IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(_PTR) new(ImNewWrapper(), _PTR)
|
|
#define IM_NEW(_TYPE) new(ImNewWrapper(), ImGui::MemAlloc(sizeof(_TYPE))) _TYPE
|
|
template<typename T> void IM_DELETE(T* p) { if (p) { p->~T(); ImGui::MemFree(p); } }
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// ImVector<>
|
|
// Lightweight std::vector<>-like class to avoid dragging dependencies (also, some implementations of STL with debug enabled are absurdly slow, we bypass it so our code runs fast in debug).
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// - You generally do NOT need to care or use this ever. But we need to make it available in imgui.h because some of our public structures are relying on it.
|
|
// - We use std-like naming convention here, which is a little unusual for this codebase.
|
|
// - Important: clear() frees memory, resize(0) keep the allocated buffer. We use resize(0) a lot to intentionally recycle allocated buffers across frames and amortize our costs.
|
|
// - Important: our implementation does NOT call C++ constructors/destructors, we treat everything as raw data! This is intentional but be extra mindful of that,
|
|
// Do NOT use this class as a std::vector replacement in your own code! Many of the structures used by dear imgui can be safely initialized by a zero-memset.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
|
|
template<typename T>
|
|
struct ImVector
|
|
{
|
|
int Size;
|
|
int Capacity;
|
|
T* Data;
|
|
|
|
// Provide standard typedefs but we don't use them ourselves.
|
|
typedef T value_type;
|
|
typedef value_type* iterator;
|
|
typedef const value_type* const_iterator;
|
|
|
|
// Constructors, destructor
|
|
inline ImVector() { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; }
|
|
inline ImVector(const ImVector<T>& src) { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; operator=(src); }
|
|
inline ImVector<T>& operator=(const ImVector<T>& src) { clear(); resize(src.Size); memcpy(Data, src.Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T)); return *this; }
|
|
inline ~ImVector() { if (Data) IM_FREE(Data); } // Important: does not destruct anything
|
|
|
|
inline void clear() { if (Data) { Size = Capacity = 0; IM_FREE(Data); Data = NULL; } } // Important: does not destruct anything
|
|
inline void clear_delete() { for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++) IM_DELETE(Data[n]); clear(); } // Important: never called automatically! always explicit.
|
|
inline void clear_destruct() { for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++) Data[n].~T(); clear(); } // Important: never called automatically! always explicit.
|
|
|
|
inline bool empty() const { return Size == 0; }
|
|
inline int size() const { return Size; }
|
|
inline int size_in_bytes() const { return Size * (int)sizeof(T); }
|
|
inline int max_size() const { return 0x7FFFFFFF / (int)sizeof(T); }
|
|
inline int capacity() const { return Capacity; }
|
|
inline T& operator[](int i) { IM_ASSERT(i >= 0 && i < Size); return Data[i]; }
|
|
inline const T& operator[](int i) const { IM_ASSERT(i >= 0 && i < Size); return Data[i]; }
|
|
|
|
inline T* begin() { return Data; }
|
|
inline const T* begin() const { return Data; }
|
|
inline T* end() { return Data + Size; }
|
|
inline const T* end() const { return Data + Size; }
|
|
inline T& front() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; }
|
|
inline const T& front() const { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; }
|
|
inline T& back() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; }
|
|
inline const T& back() const { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; }
|
|
inline void swap(ImVector<T>& rhs) { int rhs_size = rhs.Size; rhs.Size = Size; Size = rhs_size; int rhs_cap = rhs.Capacity; rhs.Capacity = Capacity; Capacity = rhs_cap; T* rhs_data = rhs.Data; rhs.Data = Data; Data = rhs_data; }
|
|
inline void fill(const T v) { for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++) Data[n] = v; }
|
|
|
|
inline int _grow_capacity(int sz) const { int new_capacity = Capacity ? (Capacity + Capacity / 2) : 8; return new_capacity > sz ? new_capacity : sz; }
|
|
inline void resize(int new_size) { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); Size = new_size; }
|
|
inline void resize(int new_size, const T& v) { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); if (new_size > Size) for (int n = Size; n < new_size; n++) memcpy(&Data[n], &v, sizeof(v)); Size = new_size; }
|
|
inline void shrink(int new_size) { IM_ASSERT(new_size <= Size); Size = new_size; } // Resize a vector to a smaller size, guaranteed not to cause a reallocation
|
|
inline void reserve(int new_capacity) { if (new_capacity <= Capacity) return; T* new_data = (T*)IM_ALLOC((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(T)); if (Data) { memcpy(new_data, Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T)); IM_FREE(Data); } Data = new_data; Capacity = new_capacity; }
|
|
|
|
// NB: It is illegal to call push_back/push_front/insert with a reference pointing inside the ImVector data itself! e.g. v.push_back(v[10]) is forbidden.
|
|
inline void push_back(const T& v) { if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); memcpy(&Data[Size], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; }
|
|
inline void pop_back() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); Size--; }
|
|
inline void push_front(const T& v) { if (Size == 0) push_back(v); else insert(Data, v); }
|
|
inline T* erase(const T* it) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + 1, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - 1) * sizeof(T)); Size--; return Data + off; }
|
|
inline T* erase(const T* it, const T* it_last){ IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size && it_last >= it && it_last <= Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t count = it_last - it; const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + count, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - (size_t)count) * sizeof(T)); Size -= (int)count; return Data + off; }
|
|
inline T* erase_unsorted(const T* it) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (it < Data + Size - 1) memcpy(Data + off, Data + Size - 1, sizeof(T)); Size--; return Data + off; }
|
|
inline T* insert(const T* it, const T& v) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it <= Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); if (off < (int)Size) memmove(Data + off + 1, Data + off, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off) * sizeof(T)); memcpy(&Data[off], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; return Data + off; }
|
|
inline bool contains(const T& v) const { const T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data++ == v) return true; return false; }
|
|
inline T* find(const T& v) { T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data == v) break; else ++data; return data; }
|
|
inline const T* find(const T& v) const { const T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data == v) break; else ++data; return data; }
|
|
inline bool find_erase(const T& v) { const T* it = find(v); if (it < Data + Size) { erase(it); return true; } return false; }
|
|
inline bool find_erase_unsorted(const T& v) { const T* it = find(v); if (it < Data + Size) { erase_unsorted(it); return true; } return false; }
|
|
inline int index_from_ptr(const T* it) const { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; }
|
|
};
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] ImGuiStyle
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// You may modify the ImGui::GetStyle() main instance during initialization and before NewFrame().
|
|
// During the frame, use ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_XXXX)/PopStyleVar() to alter the main style values,
|
|
// and ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_XXX)/PopStyleColor() for colors.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
struct ImGuiStyle
|
|
{
|
|
float Alpha; // Global alpha applies to everything in Dear ImGui.
|
|
float DisabledAlpha; // Additional alpha multiplier applied by BeginDisabled(). Multiply over current value of Alpha.
|
|
ImVec2 WindowPadding; // Padding within a window.
|
|
float WindowRounding; // Radius of window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows. Large values tend to lead to variety of artifacts and are not recommended.
|
|
float WindowBorderSize; // Thickness of border around windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
|
|
ImVec2 WindowMinSize; // Minimum window size. This is a global setting. If you want to constraint individual windows, use SetNextWindowSizeConstraints().
|
|
ImVec2 WindowTitleAlign; // Alignment for title bar text. Defaults to (0.0f,0.5f) for left-aligned,vertically centered.
|
|
ImGuiDir WindowMenuButtonPosition; // Side of the collapsing/docking button in the title bar (None/Left/Right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Left.
|
|
float ChildRounding; // Radius of child window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows.
|
|
float ChildBorderSize; // Thickness of border around child windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
|
|
float PopupRounding; // Radius of popup window corners rounding. (Note that tooltip windows use WindowRounding)
|
|
float PopupBorderSize; // Thickness of border around popup/tooltip windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
|
|
ImVec2 FramePadding; // Padding within a framed rectangle (used by most widgets).
|
|
float FrameRounding; // Radius of frame corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular frame (used by most widgets).
|
|
float FrameShading;
|
|
float FrameBorderSize; // Thickness of border around frames. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
|
|
ImVec2 ItemSpacing; // Horizontal and vertical spacing between widgets/lines.
|
|
ImVec2 ItemInnerSpacing; // Horizontal and vertical spacing between within elements of a composed widget (e.g. a slider and its label).
|
|
ImVec2 CellPadding; // Padding within a table cell
|
|
ImVec2 TouchExtraPadding; // Expand reactive bounding box for touch-based system where touch position is not accurate enough. Unfortunately we don't sort widgets so priority on overlap will always be given to the first widget. So don't grow this too much!
|
|
float IndentSpacing; // Horizontal indentation when e.g. entering a tree node. Generally == (FontSize + FramePadding.x*2).
|
|
float ColumnsMinSpacing; // Minimum horizontal spacing between two columns. Preferably > (FramePadding.x + 1).
|
|
float ScrollbarSize; // Width of the vertical scrollbar, Height of the horizontal scrollbar.
|
|
float ScrollbarRounding; // Radius of grab corners for scrollbar.
|
|
float GrabMinSize; // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar.
|
|
float GrabRounding; // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs.
|
|
float LogSliderDeadzone; // The size in pixels of the dead-zone around zero on logarithmic sliders that cross zero.
|
|
float TabRounding; // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs.
|
|
float TabBorderSize; // Thickness of border around tabs.
|
|
float TabMinWidthForCloseButton; // Minimum width for close button to appears on an unselected tab when hovered. Set to 0.0f to always show when hovering, set to FLT_MAX to never show close button unless selected.
|
|
ImGuiDir ColorButtonPosition; // Side of the color button in the ColorEdit4 widget (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Right.
|
|
ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign; // Alignment of button text when button is larger than text. Defaults to (0.5f, 0.5f) (centered).
|
|
ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign; // Alignment of selectable text. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.0f) (top-left aligned). It's generally important to keep this left-aligned if you want to lay multiple items on a same line.
|
|
ImVec2 DisplayWindowPadding; // Window position are clamped to be visible within the display area or monitors by at least this amount. Only applies to regular windows.
|
|
ImVec2 DisplaySafeAreaPadding; // If you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Apply to popups/tooltips as well regular windows. NB: Prefer configuring your TV sets correctly!
|
|
float MouseCursorScale; // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). We apply per-monitor DPI scaling over this scale. May be removed later.
|
|
bool AntiAliasedLines; // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders. Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU. Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList).
|
|
bool AntiAliasedLinesUseTex; // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures where possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering). Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList).
|
|
bool AntiAliasedFill; // Enable anti-aliased edges around filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles, etc.). Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU. Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList).
|
|
float CurveTessellationTol; // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo() without a specific number of segments. Decrease for highly tessellated curves (higher quality, more polygons), increase to reduce quality.
|
|
float CircleTessellationMaxError; // Maximum error (in pixels) allowed when using AddCircle()/AddCircleFilled() or drawing rounded corner rectangles with no explicit segment count specified. Decrease for higher quality but more geometry.
|
|
ImVec4 Colors[ImGuiCol_COUNT];
|
|
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiStyle();
|
|
IMGUI_API void ScaleAllSizes(float scale_factor);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] ImGuiIO
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Communicate most settings and inputs/outputs to Dear ImGui using this structure.
|
|
// Access via ImGui::GetIO(). Read 'Programmer guide' section in .cpp file for general usage.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Storage used by IsKeyDown(), IsKeyPressed() etc functions.
|
|
// If prior to 1.87 you used io.KeysDownDuration[] (which was marked as internal), you should use GetKeyData(key)->DownDuration and not io.KeysData[key]->DownDuration.
|
|
struct ImGuiKeyData
|
|
{
|
|
bool Down; // True for if key is down
|
|
float DownDuration; // Duration the key has been down (<0.0f: not pressed, 0.0f: just pressed, >0.0f: time held)
|
|
float DownDurationPrev; // Last frame duration the key has been down
|
|
float AnalogValue; // 0.0f..1.0f for gamepad values
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
struct ImGuiIO
|
|
{
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Configuration // Default value
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags ConfigFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiConfigFlags_ enum. Set by user/application. Gamepad/keyboard navigation options, etc.
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags BackendFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiBackendFlags_ enum. Set by backend (imgui_impl_xxx files or custom backend) to communicate features supported by the backend.
|
|
ImVec2 DisplaySize; // <unset> // Main display size, in pixels (generally == GetMainViewport()->Size). May change every frame.
|
|
float DeltaTime; // = 1.0f/60.0f // Time elapsed since last frame, in seconds. May change every frame.
|
|
float IniSavingRate; // = 5.0f // Minimum time between saving positions/sizes to .ini file, in seconds.
|
|
const char* IniFilename; // = "imgui.ini" // Path to .ini file (important: default "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir!). Set NULL to disable automatic .ini loading/saving or if you want to manually call LoadIniSettingsXXX() / SaveIniSettingsXXX() functions.
|
|
const char* LogFilename; // = "imgui_log.txt"// Path to .log file (default parameter to ImGui::LogToFile when no file is specified).
|
|
float MouseDoubleClickTime; // = 0.30f // Time for a double-click, in seconds.
|
|
float MouseDoubleClickMaxDist; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold to stay in to validate a double-click, in pixels.
|
|
float MouseDragThreshold; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold before considering we are dragging.
|
|
float KeyRepeatDelay; // = 0.250f // When holding a key/button, time before it starts repeating, in seconds (for buttons in Repeat mode, etc.).
|
|
float KeyRepeatRate; // = 0.050f // When holding a key/button, rate at which it repeats, in seconds.
|
|
void* UserData; // = NULL // Store your own data for retrieval by callbacks.
|
|
|
|
ImFontAtlas*Fonts; // <auto> // Font atlas: load, rasterize and pack one or more fonts into a single texture.
|
|
float FontGlobalScale; // = 1.0f // Global scale all fonts
|
|
bool FontAllowUserScaling; // = false // Allow user scaling text of individual window with CTRL+Wheel.
|
|
ImFont* FontDefault; // = NULL // Font to use on NewFrame(). Use NULL to uses Fonts->Fonts[0].
|
|
ImVec2 DisplayFramebufferScale; // = (1, 1) // For retina display or other situations where window coordinates are different from framebuffer coordinates. This generally ends up in ImDrawData::FramebufferScale.
|
|
|
|
// Docking options (when ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable is set)
|
|
bool ConfigDockingNoSplit; // = false // Simplified docking mode: disable window splitting, so docking is limited to merging multiple windows together into tab-bars.
|
|
bool ConfigDockingWithShift; // = false // Enable docking with holding Shift key (reduce visual noise, allows dropping in wider space)
|
|
bool ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar; // = false // [BETA] [FIXME: This currently creates regression with auto-sizing and general overhead] Make every single floating window display within a docking node.
|
|
bool ConfigDockingTransparentPayload;// = false // [BETA] Make window or viewport transparent when docking and only display docking boxes on the target viewport. Useful if rendering of multiple viewport cannot be synced. Best used with ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge.
|
|
|
|
// Viewport options (when ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable is set)
|
|
bool ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge; // = false; // Set to make all floating imgui windows always create their own viewport. Otherwise, they are merged into the main host viewports when overlapping it. May also set ImGuiViewportFlags_NoAutoMerge on individual viewport.
|
|
bool ConfigViewportsNoTaskBarIcon; // = false // Disable default OS task bar icon flag for secondary viewports. When a viewport doesn't want a task bar icon, ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon will be set on it.
|
|
bool ConfigViewportsNoDecoration; // = true // Disable default OS window decoration flag for secondary viewports. When a viewport doesn't want window decorations, ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration will be set on it. Enabling decoration can create subsequent issues at OS levels (e.g. minimum window size).
|
|
bool ConfigViewportsNoDefaultParent; // = false // Disable default OS parenting to main viewport for secondary viewports. By default, viewports are marked with ParentViewportId = <main_viewport>, expecting the platform backend to setup a parent/child relationship between the OS windows (some backend may ignore this). Set to true if you want the default to be 0, then all viewports will be top-level OS windows.
|
|
|
|
// Inertial scrolling options (when ImGuiConfigFlags_InertialScrollEnable is set)
|
|
float ConfigInertialScrollToleranceSqr;// = 36.0f // After a point moves past this distance, inertial scroll begins
|
|
|
|
// Miscellaneous options
|
|
bool MouseDrawCursor; // = false // Request ImGui to draw a mouse cursor for you (if you are on a platform without a mouse cursor). Cannot be easily renamed to 'io.ConfigXXX' because this is frequently used by backend implementations.
|
|
bool ConfigMacOSXBehaviors; // = defined(__APPLE__) // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl, Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl, Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End, Double click selects by word instead of selecting whole text, Multi-selection in lists uses Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl.
|
|
bool ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue; // = true // Enable input queue trickling: some types of events submitted during the same frame (e.g. button down + up) will be spread over multiple frames, improving interactions with low framerates.
|
|
bool ConfigInputTextCursorBlink; // = true // Enable blinking cursor (optional as some users consider it to be distracting).
|
|
bool ConfigDragClickToInputText; // = false // [BETA] Enable turning DragXXX widgets into text input with a simple mouse click-release (without moving). Not desirable on devices without a keyboard.
|
|
bool ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges; // = true // Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner. This requires (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback. (This used to be a per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide flag)
|
|
bool ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly; // = false // Enable allowing to move windows only when clicking on their title bar. Does not apply to windows without a title bar.
|
|
float ConfigMemoryCompactTimer; // = 60.0f // Timer (in seconds) to free transient windows/tables memory buffers when unused. Set to -1.0f to disable.
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Platform Functions
|
|
// (the imgui_impl_xxxx backend files are setting those up for you)
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Optional: Platform/Renderer backend name (informational only! will be displayed in About Window) + User data for backend/wrappers to store their own stuff.
|
|
const char* BackendPlatformName; // = NULL
|
|
const char* BackendRendererName; // = NULL
|
|
void* BackendPlatformUserData; // = NULL // User data for platform backend
|
|
void* BackendRendererUserData; // = NULL // User data for renderer backend
|
|
void* BackendLanguageUserData; // = NULL // User data for non C++ programming language backend
|
|
|
|
// Optional: Access OS clipboard
|
|
// (default to use native Win32 clipboard on Windows, otherwise uses a private clipboard. Override to access OS clipboard on other architectures)
|
|
const char* (*GetClipboardTextFn)(void* user_data);
|
|
void (*SetClipboardTextFn)(void* user_data, const char* text);
|
|
void* ClipboardUserData;
|
|
|
|
// Optional: Notify OS Input Method Editor of the screen position of your cursor for text input position (e.g. when using Japanese/Chinese IME on Windows)
|
|
// (default to use native imm32 api on Windows)
|
|
void (*SetPlatformImeDataFn)(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData* data);
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
void* ImeWindowHandle; // = NULL // [Obsolete] Set ImGuiViewport::PlatformHandleRaw instead. Set this to your HWND to get automatic IME cursor positioning.
|
|
#else
|
|
void* _UnusedPadding; // Unused field to keep data structure the same size.
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Input - Call before calling NewFrame()
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Input Functions
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down); // Queue a new key down/up event. Key should be "translated" (as in, generally ImGuiKey_A matches the key end-user would use to emit an 'A' character)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddKeyAnalogEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down, float v); // Queue a new key down/up event for analog values (e.g. ImGuiKey_Gamepad_ values). Dead-zones should be handled by the backend.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddMousePosEvent(float x, float y); // Queue a mouse position update. Use -FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX to signify no mouse (e.g. app not focused and not hovered)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddMouseButtonEvent(int button, bool down); // Queue a mouse button change
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddMouseWheelEvent(float wh_x, float wh_y); // Queue a mouse wheel update
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddMouseViewportEvent(ImGuiID id); // Queue a mouse hovered viewport. Requires backend to set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport to call this (for multi-viewport support).
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddFocusEvent(bool focused); // Queue a gain/loss of focus for the application (generally based on OS/platform focus of your window)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddInputCharacter(unsigned int c); // Queue a new character input
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddInputCharacterUTF16(ImWchar16 c); // Queue a new character input from an UTF-16 character, it can be a surrogate
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* str); // Queue a new characters input from an UTF-8 string
|
|
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearInputCharacters(); // [Internal] Clear the text input buffer manually
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearInputKeys(); // [Internal] Release all keys
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetKeyEventNativeData(ImGuiKey key, int native_keycode, int native_scancode, int native_legacy_index = -1); // [Optional] Specify index for legacy <1.87 IsKeyXXX() functions with native indices + specify native keycode, scancode.
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Output - Updated by NewFrame() or EndFrame()/Render()
|
|
// (when reading from the io.WantCaptureMouse, io.WantCaptureKeyboard flags to dispatch your inputs, it is
|
|
// generally easier and more correct to use their state BEFORE calling NewFrame(). See FAQ for details!)
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
bool WantCaptureMouse; // Set when Dear ImGui will use mouse inputs, in this case do not dispatch them to your main game/application (either way, always pass on mouse inputs to imgui). (e.g. unclicked mouse is hovering over an imgui window, widget is active, mouse was clicked over an imgui window, etc.).
|
|
bool WantCaptureKeyboard; // Set when Dear ImGui will use keyboard inputs, in this case do not dispatch them to your main game/application (either way, always pass keyboard inputs to imgui). (e.g. InputText active, or an imgui window is focused and navigation is enabled, etc.).
|
|
bool WantTextInput; // Mobile/console: when set, you may display an on-screen keyboard. This is set by Dear ImGui when it wants textual keyboard input to happen (e.g. when a InputText widget is active).
|
|
bool WantSetMousePos; // MousePos has been altered, backend should reposition mouse on next frame. Rarely used! Set only when ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag is enabled.
|
|
bool WantSaveIniSettings; // When manual .ini load/save is active (io.IniFilename == NULL), this will be set to notify your application that you can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory() and save yourself. Important: clear io.WantSaveIniSettings yourself after saving!
|
|
bool IsSomethingHappening; // This is set to true when inertial scrolling is happening.
|
|
bool NavActive; // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation is currently allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events) = a window is focused and it doesn't use the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag.
|
|
bool NavVisible; // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation is visible and allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events).
|
|
float Framerate; // Rough estimate of application framerate, in frame per second. Solely for convenience. Rolling average estimation based on io.DeltaTime over 120 frames.
|
|
int MetricsRenderVertices; // Vertices output during last call to Render()
|
|
int MetricsRenderIndices; // Indices output during last call to Render() = number of triangles * 3
|
|
int MetricsRenderWindows; // Number of visible windows
|
|
int MetricsActiveWindows; // Number of active windows
|
|
int MetricsActiveAllocations; // Number of active allocations, updated by MemAlloc/MemFree based on current context. May be off if you have multiple imgui contexts.
|
|
ImVec2 MouseDelta; // Mouse delta. Note that this is zero if either current or previous position are invalid (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX), so a disappearing/reappearing mouse won't have a huge delta.
|
|
ImVec2 MouseDeltaPrev; // Previous mouse delta.
|
|
ImVec2 MouseSpeed; // Average mouse speed in a short timeframe. Used for inertial scroll.
|
|
|
|
// Legacy: before 1.87, we required backend to fill io.KeyMap[] (imgui->native map) during initialization and io.KeysDown[] (native indices) every frame.
|
|
// This is still temporarily supported as a legacy feature. However the new preferred scheme is for backend to call io.AddKeyEvent().
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
|
|
int KeyMap[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Input: map of indices into the KeysDown[512] entries array which represent your "native" keyboard state. The first 512 are now unused and should be kept zero. Legacy backend will write into KeyMap[] using ImGuiKey_ indices which are always >512.
|
|
bool KeysDown[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Input: Keyboard keys that are pressed (ideally left in the "native" order your engine has access to keyboard keys, so you can use your own defines/enums for keys). This used to be [512] sized. It is now ImGuiKey_COUNT to allow legacy io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex(...)] to work without an overflow.
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [Internal] Dear ImGui will maintain those fields. Forward compatibility not guaranteed!
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Main Input State
|
|
// (this block used to be written by backend, since 1.87 it is best to NOT write to those directly, call the AddXXX functions above instead)
|
|
// (reading from those variables is fair game, as they are extremely unlikely to be moving anywhere)
|
|
ImVec2 MousePos; // Mouse position, in pixels. Set to ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX) if mouse is unavailable (on another screen, etc.)
|
|
bool MouseDown[5]; // Mouse buttons: 0=left, 1=right, 2=middle + extras (ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT == 5). Dear ImGui mostly uses left and right buttons. Others buttons allows us to track if the mouse is being used by your application + available to user as a convenience via IsMouse** API.
|
|
float MouseWheel; // Mouse wheel Vertical: 1 unit scrolls about 5 lines text.
|
|
float MouseWheelH; // Mouse wheel Horizontal. Most users don't have a mouse with an horizontal wheel, may not be filled by all backends.
|
|
ImGuiID MouseHoveredViewport; // (Optional) Modify using io.AddMouseViewportEvent(). With multi-viewports: viewport the OS mouse is hovering. If possible _IGNORING_ viewports with the ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs flag is much better (few backends can handle that). Set io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport if you can provide this info. If you don't imgui will infer the value using the rectangles and last focused time of the viewports it knows about (ignoring other OS windows).
|
|
bool KeyCtrl; // Keyboard modifier down: Control
|
|
bool KeyShift; // Keyboard modifier down: Shift
|
|
bool KeyAlt; // Keyboard modifier down: Alt
|
|
bool KeySuper; // Keyboard modifier down: Cmd/Super/Windows
|
|
float NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT]; // Gamepad inputs. Cleared back to zero by EndFrame(). Keyboard keys will be auto-mapped and be written here by NewFrame().
|
|
|
|
// Other state maintained from data above + IO function calls
|
|
ImGuiModFlags KeyMods; // Key mods flags (same as io.KeyCtrl/KeyShift/KeyAlt/KeySuper but merged into flags), updated by NewFrame()
|
|
ImGuiKeyData KeysData[ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE]; // Key state for all known keys. Use IsKeyXXX() functions to access this.
|
|
bool WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose; // Alternative to WantCaptureMouse: (WantCaptureMouse == true && WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose == false) when a click over void is expected to close a popup.
|
|
ImVec2 MousePosPrev; // Previous mouse position (note that MouseDelta is not necessary == MousePos-MousePosPrev, in case either position is invalid)
|
|
ImVec2 MouseClickedPos[5]; // Position at time of clicking
|
|
double MouseClickedTime[5]; // Time of last click (used to figure out double-click)
|
|
bool MouseClicked[5]; // Mouse button went from !Down to Down (same as MouseClickedCount[x] != 0)
|
|
bool MouseDoubleClicked[5]; // Has mouse button been double-clicked? (same as MouseClickedCount[x] == 2)
|
|
ImU16 MouseClickedCount[5]; // == 0 (not clicked), == 1 (same as MouseClicked[]), == 2 (double-clicked), == 3 (triple-clicked) etc. when going from !Down to Down
|
|
ImU16 MouseClickedLastCount[5]; // Count successive number of clicks. Stays valid after mouse release. Reset after another click is done.
|
|
bool MouseReleased[5]; // Mouse button went from Down to !Down
|
|
bool MouseDownOwned[5]; // Track if button was clicked inside a dear imgui window or over void blocked by a popup. We don't request mouse capture from the application if click started outside ImGui bounds.
|
|
bool MouseDownOwnedUnlessPopupClose[5]; // Track if button was clicked inside a dear imgui window.
|
|
float MouseDownDuration[5]; // Duration the mouse button has been down (0.0f == just clicked)
|
|
float MouseDownDurationPrev[5]; // Previous time the mouse button has been down
|
|
ImVec2 MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[5]; // Maximum distance, absolute, on each axis, of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point
|
|
float MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[5]; // Squared maximum distance of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point (used for moving thresholds)
|
|
float NavInputsDownDuration[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT];
|
|
float NavInputsDownDurationPrev[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT];
|
|
float PenPressure; // Touch/Pen pressure (0.0f to 1.0f, should be >0.0f only when MouseDown[0] == true). Helper storage currently unused by Dear ImGui.
|
|
bool AppFocusLost;
|
|
ImS8 BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays; // -1: unknown, 0: using AddKeyEvent(), 1: using legacy io.KeysDown[]
|
|
bool BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray; // 0: using AddKeyAnalogEvent(), 1: writing to legacy io.NavInputs[] directly
|
|
ImWchar16 InputQueueSurrogate; // For AddInputCharacterUTF16()
|
|
ImVector<ImWchar> InputQueueCharacters; // Queue of _characters_ input (obtained by platform backend). Fill using AddInputCharacter() helper.
|
|
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiIO();
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Misc data structures
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Shared state of InputText(), passed as an argument to your callback when a ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* flag is used.
|
|
// The callback function should return 0 by default.
|
|
// Callbacks (follow a flag name and see comments in ImGuiInputTextFlags_ declarations for more details)
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit: Callback on buffer edit (note that InputText() already returns true on edit, the callback is useful mainly to manipulate the underlying buffer while focus is active)
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways: Callback on each iteration
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion: Callback on pressing TAB
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory: Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter: Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard.
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize: Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow.
|
|
struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags EventFlag; // One ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* // Read-only
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags Flags; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only
|
|
void* UserData; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only
|
|
|
|
// Arguments for the different callback events
|
|
// - To modify the text buffer in a callback, prefer using the InsertChars() / DeleteChars() function. InsertChars() will take care of calling the resize callback if necessary.
|
|
// - If you know your edits are not going to resize the underlying buffer allocation, you may modify the contents of 'Buf[]' directly. You need to update 'BufTextLen' accordingly (0 <= BufTextLen < BufSize) and set 'BufDirty'' to true so InputText can update its internal state.
|
|
ImWchar EventChar; // Character input // Read-write // [CharFilter] Replace character with another one, or set to zero to drop. return 1 is equivalent to setting EventChar=0;
|
|
ImGuiKey EventKey; // Key pressed (Up/Down/TAB) // Read-only // [Completion,History]
|
|
char* Buf; // Text buffer // Read-write // [Resize] Can replace pointer / [Completion,History,Always] Only write to pointed data, don't replace the actual pointer!
|
|
int BufTextLen; // Text length (in bytes) // Read-write // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Exclude zero-terminator storage. In C land: == strlen(some_text), in C++ land: string.length()
|
|
int BufSize; // Buffer size (in bytes) = capacity+1 // Read-only // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Include zero-terminator storage. In C land == ARRAYSIZE(my_char_array), in C++ land: string.capacity()+1
|
|
bool BufDirty; // Set if you modify Buf/BufTextLen! // Write // [Completion,History,Always]
|
|
int CursorPos; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always]
|
|
int SelectionStart; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always] == to SelectionEnd when no selection)
|
|
int SelectionEnd; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always]
|
|
|
|
// Helper functions for text manipulation.
|
|
// Use those function to benefit from the CallbackResize behaviors. Calling those function reset the selection.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextCallbackData();
|
|
IMGUI_API void DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count);
|
|
IMGUI_API void InsertChars(int pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL);
|
|
void SelectAll() { SelectionStart = 0; SelectionEnd = BufTextLen; }
|
|
void ClearSelection() { SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = BufTextLen; }
|
|
bool HasSelection() const { return SelectionStart != SelectionEnd; }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Resizing callback data to apply custom constraint. As enabled by SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). Callback is called during the next Begin().
|
|
// NB: For basic min/max size constraint on each axis you don't need to use the callback! The SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() parameters are enough.
|
|
struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData
|
|
{
|
|
void* UserData; // Read-only. What user passed to SetNextWindowSizeConstraints()
|
|
ImVec2 Pos; // Read-only. Window position, for reference.
|
|
ImVec2 CurrentSize; // Read-only. Current window size.
|
|
ImVec2 DesiredSize; // Read-write. Desired size, based on user's mouse position. Write to this field to restrain resizing.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// [ALPHA] Rarely used / very advanced uses only. Use with SetNextWindowClass() and DockSpace() functions.
|
|
// Important: the content of this class is still highly WIP and likely to change and be refactored
|
|
// before we stabilize Docking features. Please be mindful if using this.
|
|
// Provide hints:
|
|
// - To the platform backend via altered viewport flags (enable/disable OS decoration, OS task bar icons, etc.)
|
|
// - To the platform backend for OS level parent/child relationships of viewport.
|
|
// - To the docking system for various options and filtering.
|
|
struct ImGuiWindowClass
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiID ClassId; // User data. 0 = Default class (unclassed). Windows of different classes cannot be docked with each others.
|
|
ImGuiID ParentViewportId; // Hint for the platform backend. -1: use default. 0: request platform backend to not parent the platform. != 0: request platform backend to create a parent<>child relationship between the platform windows. Not conforming backends are free to e.g. parent every viewport to the main viewport or not.
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags ViewportFlagsOverrideSet; // Viewport flags to set when a window of this class owns a viewport. This allows you to enforce OS decoration or task bar icon, override the defaults on a per-window basis.
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags ViewportFlagsOverrideClear; // Viewport flags to clear when a window of this class owns a viewport. This allows you to enforce OS decoration or task bar icon, override the defaults on a per-window basis.
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags TabItemFlagsOverrideSet; // [EXPERIMENTAL] TabItem flags to set when a window of this class gets submitted into a dock node tab bar. May use with ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading or ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing.
|
|
ImGuiDockNodeFlags DockNodeFlagsOverrideSet; // [EXPERIMENTAL] Dock node flags to set when a window of this class is hosted by a dock node (it doesn't have to be selected!)
|
|
bool DockingAlwaysTabBar; // Set to true to enforce single floating windows of this class always having their own docking node (equivalent of setting the global io.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar)
|
|
bool DockingAllowUnclassed; // Set to true to allow windows of this class to be docked/merged with an unclassed window. // FIXME-DOCK: Move to DockNodeFlags override?
|
|
|
|
ImGuiWindowClass() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); ParentViewportId = (ImGuiID)-1; DockingAllowUnclassed = true; }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Data payload for Drag and Drop operations: AcceptDragDropPayload(), GetDragDropPayload()
|
|
struct ImGuiPayload
|
|
{
|
|
// Members
|
|
void* Data; // Data (copied and owned by dear imgui)
|
|
int DataSize; // Data size
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
ImGuiID SourceId; // Source item id
|
|
ImGuiID SourceParentId; // Source parent id (if available)
|
|
int DataFrameCount; // Data timestamp
|
|
char DataType[32 + 1]; // Data type tag (short user-supplied string, 32 characters max)
|
|
bool Preview; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse has been hovering the target item (nb: handle overlapping drag targets)
|
|
bool Delivery; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse button is released over the target item.
|
|
|
|
ImGuiPayload() { Clear(); }
|
|
void Clear() { SourceId = SourceParentId = 0; Data = NULL; DataSize = 0; memset(DataType, 0, sizeof(DataType)); DataFrameCount = -1; Preview = Delivery = false; }
|
|
bool IsDataType(const char* type) const { return DataFrameCount != -1 && strcmp(type, DataType) == 0; }
|
|
bool IsPreview() const { return Preview; }
|
|
bool IsDelivery() const { return Delivery; }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Sorting specification for one column of a table (sizeof == 12 bytes)
|
|
struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiID ColumnUserID; // User id of the column (if specified by a TableSetupColumn() call)
|
|
ImS16 ColumnIndex; // Index of the column
|
|
ImS16 SortOrder; // Index within parent ImGuiTableSortSpecs (always stored in order starting from 0, tables sorted on a single criteria will always have a 0 here)
|
|
ImGuiSortDirection SortDirection : 8; // ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending or ImGuiSortDirection_Descending (you can use this or SortSign, whichever is more convenient for your sort function)
|
|
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Sorting specifications for a table (often handling sort specs for a single column, occasionally more)
|
|
// Obtained by calling TableGetSortSpecs().
|
|
// When 'SpecsDirty == true' you can sort your data. It will be true with sorting specs have changed since last call, or the first time.
|
|
// Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting, else you may wastefully sort your data every frame!
|
|
struct ImGuiTableSortSpecs
|
|
{
|
|
const ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* Specs; // Pointer to sort spec array.
|
|
int SpecsCount; // Sort spec count. Most often 1. May be > 1 when ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti is enabled. May be == 0 when ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate is enabled.
|
|
bool SpecsDirty; // Set to true when specs have changed since last time! Use this to sort again, then clear the flag.
|
|
|
|
ImGuiTableSortSpecs() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, ImColor)
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Unicode defines
|
|
#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID 0xFFFD // Invalid Unicode code point (standard value).
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32
|
|
#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX 0x10FFFF // Maximum Unicode code point supported by this build.
|
|
#else
|
|
#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX 0xFFFF // Maximum Unicode code point supported by this build.
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Execute a block of code at maximum once a frame. Convenient if you want to quickly create an UI within deep-nested code that runs multiple times every frame.
|
|
// Usage: static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame oaf; if (oaf) ImGui::Text("This will be called only once per frame");
|
|
struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiOnceUponAFrame() { RefFrame = -1; }
|
|
mutable int RefFrame;
|
|
operator bool() const { int current_frame = ImGui::GetFrameCount(); if (RefFrame == current_frame) return false; RefFrame = current_frame; return true; }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]"
|
|
struct ImGuiTextFilter
|
|
{
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiTextFilter(const char* default_filter = "");
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Draw(const char* label = "Filter (inc,-exc)", float width = 0.0f); // Helper calling InputText+Build
|
|
IMGUI_API bool PassFilter(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void Build();
|
|
void Clear() { InputBuf[0] = 0; Build(); }
|
|
bool IsActive() const { return !Filters.empty(); }
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
struct ImGuiTextRange
|
|
{
|
|
const char* b;
|
|
const char* e;
|
|
|
|
ImGuiTextRange() { b = e = NULL; }
|
|
ImGuiTextRange(const char* _b, const char* _e) { b = _b; e = _e; }
|
|
bool empty() const { return b == e; }
|
|
IMGUI_API void split(char separator, ImVector<ImGuiTextRange>* out) const;
|
|
};
|
|
char InputBuf[256];
|
|
ImVector<ImGuiTextRange>Filters;
|
|
int CountGrep;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Growable text buffer for logging/accumulating text
|
|
// (this could be called 'ImGuiTextBuilder' / 'ImGuiStringBuilder')
|
|
struct ImGuiTextBuffer
|
|
{
|
|
ImVector<char> Buf;
|
|
IMGUI_API static char EmptyString[1];
|
|
|
|
ImGuiTextBuffer() { }
|
|
inline char operator[](int i) const { IM_ASSERT(Buf.Data != NULL); return Buf.Data[i]; }
|
|
const char* begin() const { return Buf.Data ? &Buf.front() : EmptyString; }
|
|
const char* end() const { return Buf.Data ? &Buf.back() : EmptyString; } // Buf is zero-terminated, so end() will point on the zero-terminator
|
|
int size() const { return Buf.Size ? Buf.Size - 1 : 0; }
|
|
bool empty() const { return Buf.Size <= 1; }
|
|
void clear() { Buf.clear(); }
|
|
void reserve(int capacity) { Buf.reserve(capacity); }
|
|
const char* c_str() const { return Buf.Data ? Buf.Data : EmptyString; }
|
|
IMGUI_API void append(const char* str, const char* str_end = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void appendf(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API void appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Key->Value storage
|
|
// Typically you don't have to worry about this since a storage is held within each Window.
|
|
// We use it to e.g. store collapse state for a tree (Int 0/1)
|
|
// This is optimized for efficient lookup (dichotomy into a contiguous buffer) and rare insertion (typically tied to user interactions aka max once a frame)
|
|
// You can use it as custom user storage for temporary values. Declare your own storage if, for example:
|
|
// - You want to manipulate the open/close state of a particular sub-tree in your interface (tree node uses Int 0/1 to store their state).
|
|
// - You want to store custom debug data easily without adding or editing structures in your code (probably not efficient, but convenient)
|
|
// Types are NOT stored, so it is up to you to make sure your Key don't collide with different types.
|
|
struct ImGuiStorage
|
|
{
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
struct ImGuiStoragePair
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiID key;
|
|
union { int val_i; float val_f; void* val_p; };
|
|
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, int _val_i) { key = _key; val_i = _val_i; }
|
|
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, float _val_f) { key = _key; val_f = _val_f; }
|
|
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, void* _val_p) { key = _key; val_p = _val_p; }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
ImVector<ImGuiStoragePair> Data;
|
|
|
|
// - Get***() functions find pair, never add/allocate. Pairs are sorted so a query is O(log N)
|
|
// - Set***() functions find pair, insertion on demand if missing.
|
|
// - Sorted insertion is costly, paid once. A typical frame shouldn't need to insert any new pair.
|
|
void Clear() { Data.clear(); }
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetInt(ImGuiID key, int default_val = 0) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetInt(ImGuiID key, int val);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool GetBool(ImGuiID key, bool default_val = false) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetBool(ImGuiID key, bool val);
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetFloat(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetFloat(ImGuiID key, float val);
|
|
IMGUI_API void* GetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key) const; // default_val is NULL
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key, void* val);
|
|
|
|
// - Get***Ref() functions finds pair, insert on demand if missing, return pointer. Useful if you intend to do Get+Set.
|
|
// - References are only valid until a new value is added to the storage. Calling a Set***() function or a Get***Ref() function invalidates the pointer.
|
|
// - A typical use case where this is convenient for quick hacking (e.g. add storage during a live Edit&Continue session if you can't modify existing struct)
|
|
// float* pvar = ImGui::GetFloatRef(key); ImGui::SliderFloat("var", pvar, 0, 100.0f); some_var += *pvar;
|
|
IMGUI_API int* GetIntRef(ImGuiID key, int default_val = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool* GetBoolRef(ImGuiID key, bool default_val = false);
|
|
IMGUI_API float* GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void** GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void* default_val = NULL);
|
|
|
|
// Use on your own storage if you know only integer are being stored (open/close all tree nodes)
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetAllInt(int val);
|
|
|
|
// For quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once.
|
|
IMGUI_API void BuildSortByKey();
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Manually clip large list of items.
|
|
// If you have lots evenly spaced items and you have a random access to the list, you can perform coarse
|
|
// clipping based on visibility to only submit items that are in view.
|
|
// The clipper calculates the range of visible items and advance the cursor to compensate for the non-visible items we have skipped.
|
|
// (Dear ImGui already clip items based on their bounds but: it needs to first layout the item to do so, and generally
|
|
// fetching/submitting your own data incurs additional cost. Coarse clipping using ImGuiListClipper allows you to easily
|
|
// scale using lists with tens of thousands of items without a problem)
|
|
// Usage:
|
|
// ImGuiListClipper clipper;
|
|
// clipper.Begin(1000); // We have 1000 elements, evenly spaced.
|
|
// while (clipper.Step())
|
|
// for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
|
|
// ImGui::Text("line number %d", i);
|
|
// Generally what happens is:
|
|
// - Clipper lets you process the first element (DisplayStart = 0, DisplayEnd = 1) regardless of it being visible or not.
|
|
// - User code submit that one element.
|
|
// - Clipper can measure the height of the first element
|
|
// - Clipper calculate the actual range of elements to display based on the current clipping rectangle, position the cursor before the first visible element.
|
|
// - User code submit visible elements.
|
|
// - The clipper also handles various subtleties related to keyboard/gamepad navigation, wrapping etc.
|
|
struct ImGuiListClipper
|
|
{
|
|
int DisplayStart; // First item to display, updated by each call to Step()
|
|
int DisplayEnd; // End of items to display (exclusive)
|
|
int ItemsCount; // [Internal] Number of items
|
|
float ItemsHeight; // [Internal] Height of item after a first step and item submission can calculate it
|
|
float StartPosY; // [Internal] Cursor position at the time of Begin() or after table frozen rows are all processed
|
|
void* TempData; // [Internal] Internal data
|
|
|
|
// items_count: Use INT_MAX if you don't know how many items you have (in which case the cursor won't be advanced in the final step)
|
|
// items_height: Use -1.0f to be calculated automatically on first step. Otherwise pass in the distance between your items, typically GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() or GetFrameHeightWithSpacing().
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiListClipper();
|
|
IMGUI_API ~ImGuiListClipper();
|
|
IMGUI_API void Begin(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void End(); // Automatically called on the last call of Step() that returns false.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Step(); // Call until it returns false. The DisplayStart/DisplayEnd fields will be set and you can process/draw those items.
|
|
|
|
// Call ForceDisplayRangeByIndices() before first call to Step() if you need a range of items to be displayed regardless of visibility.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ForceDisplayRangeByIndices(int item_min, int item_max); // item_max is exclusive e.g. use (42, 42+1) to make item 42 always visible BUT due to alignment/padding of certain items it is likely that an extra item may be included on either end of the display range.
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
inline ImGuiListClipper(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f) { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); ItemsCount = -1; Begin(items_count, items_height); } // [removed in 1.79]
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helpers macros to generate 32-bit encoded colors
|
|
// User can declare their own format by #defining the 5 _SHIFT/_MASK macros in their imconfig file.
|
|
#ifndef IM_COL32_R_SHIFT
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR
|
|
#define IM_COL32_R_SHIFT 16
|
|
#define IM_COL32_G_SHIFT 8
|
|
#define IM_COL32_B_SHIFT 0
|
|
#define IM_COL32_A_SHIFT 24
|
|
#define IM_COL32_A_MASK 0xFF000000
|
|
#else
|
|
#define IM_COL32_R_SHIFT 0
|
|
#define IM_COL32_G_SHIFT 8
|
|
#define IM_COL32_B_SHIFT 16
|
|
#define IM_COL32_A_SHIFT 24
|
|
#define IM_COL32_A_MASK 0xFF000000
|
|
#endif
|
|
#endif
|
|
#define IM_COL32(R,G,B,A) (((ImU32)(A)<<IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(B)<<IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(G)<<IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(R)<<IM_COL32_R_SHIFT))
|
|
#define IM_COL32_WHITE IM_COL32(255,255,255,255) // Opaque white = 0xFFFFFFFF
|
|
#define IM_COL32_BLACK IM_COL32(0,0,0,255) // Opaque black
|
|
#define IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS IM_COL32(0,0,0,0) // Transparent black = 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
// Helper: ImColor() implicitly converts colors to either ImU32 (packed 4x1 byte) or ImVec4 (4x1 float)
|
|
// Prefer using IM_COL32() macros if you want a guaranteed compile-time ImU32 for usage with ImDrawList API.
|
|
// **Avoid storing ImColor! Store either u32 of ImVec4. This is not a full-featured color class. MAY OBSOLETE.
|
|
// **None of the ImGui API are using ImColor directly but you can use it as a convenience to pass colors in either ImU32 or ImVec4 formats. Explicitly cast to ImU32 or ImVec4 if needed.
|
|
struct ImColor
|
|
{
|
|
ImVec4 Value;
|
|
|
|
constexpr ImColor() { }
|
|
constexpr ImColor(float r, float g, float b, float a = 1.0f) : Value(r, g, b, a) { }
|
|
constexpr ImColor(const ImVec4& col) : Value(col) {}
|
|
ImColor(int r, int g, int b, int a = 255) { float sc = 1.0f / 255.0f; Value.x = (float)r * sc; Value.y = (float)g * sc; Value.z = (float)b * sc; Value.w = (float)a * sc; }
|
|
ImColor(ImU32 rgba) { float sc = 1.0f / 255.0f; Value.x = (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * sc; Value.y = (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * sc; Value.z = (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * sc; Value.w = (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * sc; }
|
|
inline operator ImU32() const { return ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(Value); }
|
|
inline operator ImVec4() const { return Value; }
|
|
|
|
// FIXME-OBSOLETE: May need to obsolete/cleanup those helpers.
|
|
inline void SetHSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f){ ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, Value.x, Value.y, Value.z); Value.w = a; }
|
|
static ImColor HSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f) { float r, g, b; ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, r, g, b); return ImColor(r, g, b, a); }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Drawing API (ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListSplitter, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData)
|
|
// Hold a series of drawing commands. The user provides a renderer for ImDrawData which essentially contains an array of ImDrawList.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// The maximum line width to bake anti-aliased textures for. Build atlas with ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines to disable baking.
|
|
#ifndef IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX
|
|
#define IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX (63)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// ImDrawCallback: Draw callbacks for advanced uses [configurable type: override in imconfig.h]
|
|
// NB: You most likely do NOT need to use draw callbacks just to create your own widget or customized UI rendering,
|
|
// you can poke into the draw list for that! Draw callback may be useful for example to:
|
|
// A) Change your GPU render state,
|
|
// B) render a complex 3D scene inside a UI element without an intermediate texture/render target, etc.
|
|
// The expected behavior from your rendering function is 'if (cmd.UserCallback != NULL) { cmd.UserCallback(parent_list, cmd); } else { RenderTriangles() }'
|
|
// If you want to override the signature of ImDrawCallback, you can simply use e.g. '#define ImDrawCallback MyDrawCallback' (in imconfig.h) + update rendering backend accordingly.
|
|
#ifndef ImDrawCallback
|
|
typedef void (*ImDrawCallback)(const ImDrawList* parent_list, const ImDrawCmd* cmd);
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Special Draw callback value to request renderer backend to reset the graphics/render state.
|
|
// The renderer backend needs to handle this special value, otherwise it will crash trying to call a function at this address.
|
|
// This is useful for example if you submitted callbacks which you know have altered the render state and you want it to be restored.
|
|
// It is not done by default because they are many perfectly useful way of altering render state for imgui contents (e.g. changing shader/blending settings before an Image call).
|
|
#define ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState (ImDrawCallback)(-1)
|
|
|
|
// Typically, 1 command = 1 GPU draw call (unless command is a callback)
|
|
// - VtxOffset: When 'io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled,
|
|
// this fields allow us to render meshes larger than 64K vertices while keeping 16-bit indices.
|
|
// Backends made for <1.71. will typically ignore the VtxOffset fields.
|
|
// - The ClipRect/TextureId/VtxOffset fields must be contiguous as we memcmp() them together (this is asserted for).
|
|
struct ImDrawCmd
|
|
{
|
|
ImVec4 ClipRect; // 4*4 // Clipping rectangle (x1, y1, x2, y2). Subtract ImDrawData->DisplayPos to get clipping rectangle in "viewport" coordinates
|
|
ImTextureID TextureId; // 4-8 // User-provided texture ID. Set by user in ImfontAtlas::SetTexID() for fonts or passed to Image*() functions. Ignore if never using images or multiple fonts atlas.
|
|
unsigned int VtxOffset; // 4 // Start offset in vertex buffer. ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset: always 0, otherwise may be >0 to support meshes larger than 64K vertices with 16-bit indices.
|
|
unsigned int IdxOffset; // 4 // Start offset in index buffer.
|
|
unsigned int ElemCount; // 4 // Number of indices (multiple of 3) to be rendered as triangles. Vertices are stored in the callee ImDrawList's vtx_buffer[] array, indices in idx_buffer[].
|
|
ImDrawCallback UserCallback; // 4-8 // If != NULL, call the function instead of rendering the vertices. clip_rect and texture_id will be set normally.
|
|
void* UserCallbackData; // 4-8 // The draw callback code can access this.
|
|
|
|
ImDrawCmd() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } // Also ensure our padding fields are zeroed
|
|
|
|
// Since 1.83: returns ImTextureID associated with this draw call. Warning: DO NOT assume this is always same as 'TextureId' (we will change this function for an upcoming feature)
|
|
inline ImTextureID GetTexID() const { return TextureId; }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Vertex layout
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT
|
|
struct ImDrawVert
|
|
{
|
|
ImVec2 pos;
|
|
ImVec2 uv;
|
|
ImU32 col;
|
|
};
|
|
#else
|
|
// You can override the vertex format layout by defining IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT in imconfig.h
|
|
// The code expect ImVec2 pos (8 bytes), ImVec2 uv (8 bytes), ImU32 col (4 bytes), but you can re-order them or add other fields as needed to simplify integration in your engine.
|
|
// The type has to be described within the macro (you can either declare the struct or use a typedef). This is because ImVec2/ImU32 are likely not declared a the time you'd want to set your type up.
|
|
// NOTE: IMGUI DOESN'T CLEAR THE STRUCTURE AND DOESN'T CALL A CONSTRUCTOR SO ANY CUSTOM FIELD WILL BE UNINITIALIZED. IF YOU ADD EXTRA FIELDS (SUCH AS A 'Z' COORDINATES) YOU WILL NEED TO CLEAR THEM DURING RENDER OR TO IGNORE THEM.
|
|
IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT;
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] For use by ImDrawList
|
|
struct ImDrawCmdHeader
|
|
{
|
|
ImVec4 ClipRect;
|
|
ImTextureID TextureId;
|
|
unsigned int VtxOffset;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] For use by ImDrawListSplitter
|
|
struct ImDrawChannel
|
|
{
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawCmd> _CmdBuffer;
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawIdx> _IdxBuffer;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
// Split/Merge functions are used to split the draw list into different layers which can be drawn into out of order.
|
|
// This is used by the Columns/Tables API, so items of each column can be batched together in a same draw call.
|
|
struct ImDrawListSplitter
|
|
{
|
|
int _Current; // Current channel number (0)
|
|
int _Count; // Number of active channels (1+)
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawChannel> _Channels; // Draw channels (not resized down so _Count might be < Channels.Size)
|
|
|
|
inline ImDrawListSplitter() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
|
|
inline ~ImDrawListSplitter() { ClearFreeMemory(); }
|
|
inline void Clear() { _Current = 0; _Count = 1; } // Do not clear Channels[] so our allocations are reused next frame
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearFreeMemory();
|
|
IMGUI_API void Split(ImDrawList* draw_list, int count);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Merge(ImDrawList* draw_list);
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCurrentChannel(ImDrawList* draw_list, int channel_idx);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImDrawList functions
|
|
// (Legacy: bit 0 must always correspond to ImDrawFlags_Closed to be backward compatible with old API using a bool. Bits 1..3 must be unused)
|
|
enum ImDrawFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImDrawFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_Closed = 1 << 0, // PathStroke(), AddPolyline(): specify that shape should be closed (Important: this is always == 1 for legacy reason)
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft = 1 << 4, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding top-left corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x01.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight = 1 << 5, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding top-right corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x02.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft = 1 << 6, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding bottom-left corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x04.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight = 1 << 7, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding bottom-right corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Wax 0x08.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone = 1 << 8, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): disable rounding on all corners (when rounding > 0.0f). This is NOT zero, NOT an implicit flag!
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersDefault_ = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Default to ALL corners if none of the _RoundCornersXX flags are specified.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_ = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImDrawList instance. Those are set automatically by ImGui:: functions from ImGuiIO settings, and generally not manipulated directly.
|
|
// It is however possible to temporarily alter flags between calls to ImDrawList:: functions.
|
|
enum ImDrawListFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines = 1 << 0, // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders (*2 the number of triangles for 1.0f wide line or lines thin enough to be drawn using textures, otherwise *3 the number of triangles)
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = 1 << 1, // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures when possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering).
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill = 1 << 2, // Enable anti-aliased edge around filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles).
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset = 1 << 3 // Can emit 'VtxOffset > 0' to allow large meshes. Set when 'ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Draw command list
|
|
// This is the low-level list of polygons that ImGui:: functions are filling. At the end of the frame,
|
|
// all command lists are passed to your ImGuiIO::RenderDrawListFn function for rendering.
|
|
// Each dear imgui window contains its own ImDrawList. You can use ImGui::GetWindowDrawList() to
|
|
// access the current window draw list and draw custom primitives.
|
|
// You can interleave normal ImGui:: calls and adding primitives to the current draw list.
|
|
// In single viewport mode, top-left is == GetMainViewport()->Pos (generally 0,0), bottom-right is == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size (generally io.DisplaySize).
|
|
// You are totally free to apply whatever transformation matrix to want to the data (depending on the use of the transformation you may want to apply it to ClipRect as well!)
|
|
// Important: Primitives are always added to the list and not culled (culling is done at higher-level by ImGui:: functions), if you use this API a lot consider coarse culling your drawn objects.
|
|
struct ImDrawList
|
|
{
|
|
// This is what you have to render
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawCmd> CmdBuffer; // Draw commands. Typically 1 command = 1 GPU draw call, unless the command is a callback.
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawIdx> IdxBuffer; // Index buffer. Each command consume ImDrawCmd::ElemCount of those
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawVert> VtxBuffer; // Vertex buffer.
|
|
ImDrawListFlags Flags; // Flags, you may poke into these to adjust anti-aliasing settings per-primitive.
|
|
|
|
// [Internal, used while building lists]
|
|
unsigned int _VtxCurrentIdx; // [Internal] generally == VtxBuffer.Size unless we are past 64K vertices, in which case this gets reset to 0.
|
|
const ImDrawListSharedData* _Data; // Pointer to shared draw data (you can use ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() to get the one from current ImGui context)
|
|
const char* _OwnerName; // Pointer to owner window's name for debugging
|
|
ImDrawVert* _VtxWritePtr; // [Internal] point within VtxBuffer.Data after each add command (to avoid using the ImVector<> operators too much)
|
|
ImDrawIdx* _IdxWritePtr; // [Internal] point within IdxBuffer.Data after each add command (to avoid using the ImVector<> operators too much)
|
|
ImVector<ImVec4> _ClipRectStack; // [Internal]
|
|
ImVector<ImTextureID> _TextureIdStack; // [Internal]
|
|
ImVector<ImVec2> _Path; // [Internal] current path building
|
|
ImDrawCmdHeader _CmdHeader; // [Internal] template of active commands. Fields should match those of CmdBuffer.back().
|
|
ImDrawListSplitter _Splitter; // [Internal] for channels api (note: prefer using your own persistent instance of ImDrawListSplitter!)
|
|
float _FringeScale; // [Internal] anti-alias fringe is scaled by this value, this helps to keep things sharp while zooming at vertex buffer content
|
|
|
|
// If you want to create ImDrawList instances, pass them ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() or create and use your own ImDrawListSharedData (so you can use ImDrawList without ImGui)
|
|
ImDrawList(const ImDrawListSharedData* shared_data) { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); _Data = shared_data; }
|
|
|
|
~ImDrawList() { _ClearFreeMemory(); }
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect = false); // Render-level scissoring. This is passed down to your render function but not used for CPU-side coarse clipping. Prefer using higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() to affect logic (hit-testing and widget culling)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushClipRectFullScreen();
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopClipRect();
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushTextureID(ImTextureID texture_id);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopTextureID();
|
|
inline ImVec2 GetClipRectMin() const { const ImVec4& cr = _ClipRectStack.back(); return ImVec2(cr.x, cr.y); }
|
|
inline ImVec2 GetClipRectMax() const { const ImVec4& cr = _ClipRectStack.back(); return ImVec2(cr.z, cr.w); }
|
|
|
|
// Primitives
|
|
// - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward" anti-aliasing.
|
|
// - For rectangular primitives, "p_min" and "p_max" represent the upper-left and lower-right corners.
|
|
// - For circle primitives, use "num_segments == 0" to automatically calculate tessellation (preferred).
|
|
// In older versions (until Dear ImGui 1.77) the AddCircle functions defaulted to num_segments == 12.
|
|
// In future versions we will use textures to provide cheaper and higher-quality circles.
|
|
// Use AddNgon() and AddNgonFilled() functions if you need to guaranteed a specific number of sides.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddLine(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddRect(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float thickness = 1.0f); // a: upper-left, b: lower-right (== upper-left + size)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddRectFilled(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0); // a: upper-left, b: lower-right (== upper-left + size)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddRectFilledMultiColor(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col_upr_left, ImU32 col_upr_right, ImU32 col_bot_right, ImU32 col_bot_left, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddQuad(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddQuadFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddTriangle(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddTriangleFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddCircle(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddCircleFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddNgon(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddNgonFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddText(const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddText(const ImFont* font, float font_size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL, float wrap_width = 0.0f, const ImVec4* cpu_fine_clip_rect = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddPolyline(const ImVec2* points, int num_points, ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddConvexPolyFilled(const ImVec2* points, int num_points, ImU32 col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddBezierCubic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddBezierQuadratic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0); // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points)
|
|
|
|
// Image primitives
|
|
// - Read FAQ to understand what ImTextureID is.
|
|
// - "p_min" and "p_max" represent the upper-left and lower-right corners of the rectangle.
|
|
// - "uv_min" and "uv_max" represent the normalized texture coordinates to use for those corners. Using (0,0)->(1,1) texture coordinates will generally display the entire texture.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddImage(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv_max = ImVec2(1, 1), ImU32 col = IM_COL32_WHITE);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddImageQuad(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv2 = ImVec2(1, 0), const ImVec2& uv3 = ImVec2(1, 1), const ImVec2& uv4 = ImVec2(0, 1), ImU32 col = IM_COL32_WHITE);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddImageRounded(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min, const ImVec2& uv_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Stateful path API, add points then finish with PathFillConvex() or PathStroke()
|
|
// - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward" anti-aliasing.
|
|
inline void PathClear() { _Path.Size = 0; }
|
|
inline void PathLineTo(const ImVec2& pos) { _Path.push_back(pos); }
|
|
inline void PathLineToMergeDuplicate(const ImVec2& pos) { if (_Path.Size == 0 || memcmp(&_Path.Data[_Path.Size - 1], &pos, 8) != 0) _Path.push_back(pos); }
|
|
inline void PathFillConvex(ImU32 col) { AddConvexPolyFilled(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col); _Path.Size = 0; }
|
|
inline void PathStroke(ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float thickness = 1.0f) { AddPolyline(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col, flags, thickness); _Path.Size = 0; }
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathArcToFast(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_of_12, int a_max_of_12); // Use precomputed angles for a 12 steps circle
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathBezierCubicCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, int num_segments = 0); // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathRect(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Advanced
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddCallback(ImDrawCallback callback, void* callback_data); // Your rendering function must check for 'UserCallback' in ImDrawCmd and call the function instead of rendering triangles.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddDrawCmd(); // This is useful if you need to forcefully create a new draw call (to allow for dependent rendering / blending). Otherwise primitives are merged into the same draw-call as much as possible
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList* CloneOutput() const; // Create a clone of the CmdBuffer/IdxBuffer/VtxBuffer.
|
|
|
|
// Advanced: Channels
|
|
// - Use to split render into layers. By switching channels to can render out-of-order (e.g. submit FG primitives before BG primitives)
|
|
// - Use to minimize draw calls (e.g. if going back-and-forth between multiple clipping rectangles, prefer to append into separate channels then merge at the end)
|
|
// - FIXME-OBSOLETE: This API shouldn't have been in ImDrawList in the first place!
|
|
// Prefer using your own persistent instance of ImDrawListSplitter as you can stack them.
|
|
// Using the ImDrawList::ChannelsXXXX you cannot stack a split over another.
|
|
inline void ChannelsSplit(int count) { _Splitter.Split(this, count); }
|
|
inline void ChannelsMerge() { _Splitter.Merge(this); }
|
|
inline void ChannelsSetCurrent(int n) { _Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(this, n); }
|
|
|
|
// Advanced: Primitives allocations
|
|
// - We render triangles (three vertices)
|
|
// - All primitives needs to be reserved via PrimReserve() beforehand.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimReserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimUnreserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimRect(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, ImU32 col); // Axis aligned rectangle (composed of two triangles)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimRectUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, ImU32 col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimQuadUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& d, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, const ImVec2& uv_c, const ImVec2& uv_d, ImU32 col);
|
|
inline void PrimWriteVtx(const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& uv, ImU32 col) { _VtxWritePtr->pos = pos; _VtxWritePtr->uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr->col = col; _VtxWritePtr++; _VtxCurrentIdx++; }
|
|
inline void PrimWriteIdx(ImDrawIdx idx) { *_IdxWritePtr = idx; _IdxWritePtr++; }
|
|
inline void PrimVtx(const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& uv, ImU32 col) { PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx); PrimWriteVtx(pos, uv, col); } // Write vertex with unique index
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
inline void AddBezierCurve(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0) { AddBezierCubic(p1, p2, p3, p4, col, thickness, num_segments); } // OBSOLETED in 1.80 (Jan 2021)
|
|
inline void PathBezierCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments = 0) { PathBezierCubicCurveTo(p2, p3, p4, num_segments); } // OBSOLETED in 1.80 (Jan 2021)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// [Internal helpers]
|
|
IMGUI_API void _ResetForNewFrame();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _ClearFreeMemory();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _PopUnusedDrawCmd();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _TryMergeDrawCmds();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _OnChangedClipRect();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _OnChangedTextureID();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _OnChangedVtxOffset();
|
|
IMGUI_API int _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(float radius) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void _PathArcToFastEx(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_sample, int a_max_sample, int a_step);
|
|
IMGUI_API void _PathArcToN(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// All draw data to render a Dear ImGui frame
|
|
// (NB: the style and the naming convention here is a little inconsistent, we currently preserve them for backward compatibility purpose,
|
|
// as this is one of the oldest structure exposed by the library! Basically, ImDrawList == CmdList)
|
|
struct ImDrawData
|
|
{
|
|
bool Valid; // Only valid after Render() is called and before the next NewFrame() is called.
|
|
int CmdListsCount; // Number of ImDrawList* to render
|
|
int TotalIdxCount; // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's IdxBuffer.Size
|
|
int TotalVtxCount; // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's VtxBuffer.Size
|
|
ImDrawList** CmdLists; // Array of ImDrawList* to render. The ImDrawList are owned by ImGuiContext and only pointed to from here.
|
|
ImVec2 DisplayPos; // Top-left position of the viewport to render (== top-left of the orthogonal projection matrix to use) (== GetMainViewport()->Pos for the main viewport, == (0.0) in most single-viewport applications)
|
|
ImVec2 DisplaySize; // Size of the viewport to render (== GetMainViewport()->Size for the main viewport, == io.DisplaySize in most single-viewport applications)
|
|
ImVec2 FramebufferScale; // Amount of pixels for each unit of DisplaySize. Based on io.DisplayFramebufferScale. Generally (1,1) on normal display, (2,2) on OSX with Retina display.
|
|
ImGuiViewport* OwnerViewport; // Viewport carrying the ImDrawData instance, might be of use to the renderer (generally not).
|
|
|
|
// Functions
|
|
ImDrawData() { Clear(); }
|
|
void Clear() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } // The ImDrawList are owned by ImGuiContext!
|
|
IMGUI_API void DeIndexAllBuffers(); // Helper to convert all buffers from indexed to non-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering!
|
|
IMGUI_API void ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& fb_scale); // Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd. Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than Dear ImGui expects, or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFont)
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
struct ImFontConfig
|
|
{
|
|
void* FontData; // // TTF/OTF data
|
|
int FontDataSize; // // TTF/OTF data size
|
|
bool FontDataOwnedByAtlas; // true // TTF/OTF data ownership taken by the container ImFontAtlas (will delete memory itself).
|
|
int FontNo; // 0 // Index of font within TTF/OTF file
|
|
float SizePixels; // // Size in pixels for rasterizer (more or less maps to the resulting font height).
|
|
int OversampleH; // 3 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. Note the difference between 2 and 3 is minimal so you can reduce this to 2 to save memory. Read https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/tests/oversample/README.md for details.
|
|
int OversampleV; // 1 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. This is not really useful as we don't use sub-pixel positions on the Y axis.
|
|
bool PixelSnapH; // false // Align every glyph to pixel boundary. Useful e.g. if you are merging a non-pixel aligned font with the default font. If enabled, you can set OversampleH/V to 1.
|
|
ImVec2 GlyphExtraSpacing; // 0, 0 // Extra spacing (in pixels) between glyphs. Only X axis is supported for now.
|
|
ImVec2 GlyphOffset; // 0, 0 // Offset all glyphs from this font input.
|
|
const ImWchar* GlyphRanges; // NULL // Pointer to a user-provided list of Unicode range (2 value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list). THE ARRAY DATA NEEDS TO PERSIST AS LONG AS THE FONT IS ALIVE.
|
|
float GlyphMinAdvanceX; // 0 // Minimum AdvanceX for glyphs, set Min to align font icons, set both Min/Max to enforce mono-space font
|
|
float GlyphMaxAdvanceX; // FLT_MAX // Maximum AdvanceX for glyphs
|
|
bool MergeMode; // false // Merge into previous ImFont, so you can combine multiple inputs font into one ImFont (e.g. ASCII font + icons + Japanese glyphs). You may want to use GlyphOffset.y when merge font of different heights.
|
|
unsigned int FontBuilderFlags; // 0 // Settings for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILDER IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Leave as zero if unsure.
|
|
float RasterizerMultiply; // 1.0f // Brighten (>1.0f) or darken (<1.0f) font output. Brightening small fonts may be a good workaround to make them more readable.
|
|
ImWchar EllipsisChar; // -1 // Explicitly specify unicode codepoint of ellipsis character. When fonts are being merged first specified ellipsis will be used.
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
char Name[40]; // Name (strictly to ease debugging)
|
|
ImFont* DstFont;
|
|
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFontConfig();
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Hold rendering data for one glyph.
|
|
// (Note: some language parsers may fail to convert the 31+1 bitfield members, in this case maybe drop store a single u32 or we can rework this)
|
|
struct ImFontGlyph
|
|
{
|
|
unsigned int Colored : 1; // Flag to indicate glyph is colored and should generally ignore tinting (make it usable with no shift on little-endian as this is used in loops)
|
|
unsigned int Visible : 1; // Flag to indicate glyph has no visible pixels (e.g. space). Allow early out when rendering.
|
|
unsigned int Codepoint : 30; // 0x0000..0x10FFFF
|
|
float AdvanceX; // Distance to next character (= data from font + ImFontConfig::GlyphExtraSpacing.x baked in)
|
|
float X0, Y0, X1, Y1; // Glyph corners
|
|
float U0, V0, U1, V1; // Texture coordinates
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data. Feed your application strings/characters to it then call BuildRanges().
|
|
// This is essentially a tightly packed of vector of 64k booleans = 8KB storage.
|
|
struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder
|
|
{
|
|
ImVector<ImU32> UsedChars; // Store 1-bit per Unicode code point (0=unused, 1=used)
|
|
|
|
ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder() { Clear(); }
|
|
inline void Clear() { int size_in_bytes = (IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX + 1) / 8; UsedChars.resize(size_in_bytes / (int)sizeof(ImU32)); memset(UsedChars.Data, 0, (size_t)size_in_bytes); }
|
|
inline bool GetBit(size_t n) const { int off = (int)(n >> 5); ImU32 mask = 1u << (n & 31); return (UsedChars[off] & mask) != 0; } // Get bit n in the array
|
|
inline void SetBit(size_t n) { int off = (int)(n >> 5); ImU32 mask = 1u << (n & 31); UsedChars[off] |= mask; } // Set bit n in the array
|
|
inline void AddChar(ImWchar c) { SetBit(c); } // Add character
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // Add string (each character of the UTF-8 string are added)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges); // Add ranges, e.g. builder.AddRanges(ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesDefault()) to force add all of ASCII/Latin+Ext
|
|
IMGUI_API void BuildRanges(ImVector<ImWchar>* out_ranges); // Output new ranges
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// See ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectXXX functions.
|
|
struct ImFontAtlasCustomRect
|
|
{
|
|
unsigned short Width, Height; // Input // Desired rectangle dimension
|
|
unsigned short X, Y; // Output // Packed position in Atlas
|
|
unsigned int GlyphID; // Input // For custom font glyphs only (ID < 0x110000)
|
|
float GlyphAdvanceX; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: glyph xadvance
|
|
ImVec2 GlyphOffset; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: glyph display offset
|
|
ImFont* Font; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: target font
|
|
ImFontAtlasCustomRect() { Width = Height = 0; X = Y = 0xFFFF; GlyphID = 0; GlyphAdvanceX = 0.0f; GlyphOffset = ImVec2(0, 0); Font = NULL; }
|
|
bool IsPacked() const { return X != 0xFFFF; }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImFontAtlas build
|
|
enum ImFontAtlasFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight = 1 << 0, // Don't round the height to next power of two
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors = 1 << 1, // Don't build software mouse cursors into the atlas (save a little texture memory)
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines = 1 << 2 // Don't build thick line textures into the atlas (save a little texture memory, allow support for point/nearest filtering). The AntiAliasedLinesUseTex features uses them, otherwise they will be rendered using polygons (more expensive for CPU/GPU).
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Load and rasterize multiple TTF/OTF fonts into a same texture. The font atlas will build a single texture holding:
|
|
// - One or more fonts.
|
|
// - Custom graphics data needed to render the shapes needed by Dear ImGui.
|
|
// - Mouse cursor shapes for software cursor rendering (unless setting 'Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors' in the font atlas).
|
|
// It is the user-code responsibility to setup/build the atlas, then upload the pixel data into a texture accessible by your graphics api.
|
|
// - Optionally, call any of the AddFont*** functions. If you don't call any, the default font embedded in the code will be loaded for you.
|
|
// - Call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32() to build and retrieve pixels data.
|
|
// - Upload the pixels data into a texture within your graphics system (see imgui_impl_xxxx.cpp examples)
|
|
// - Call SetTexID(my_tex_id); and pass the pointer/identifier to your texture in a format natural to your graphics API.
|
|
// This value will be passed back to you during rendering to identify the texture. Read FAQ entry about ImTextureID for more details.
|
|
// Common pitfalls:
|
|
// - If you pass a 'glyph_ranges' array to AddFont*** functions, you need to make sure that your array persist up until the
|
|
// atlas is build (when calling GetTexData*** or Build()). We only copy the pointer, not the data.
|
|
// - Important: By default, AddFontFromMemoryTTF() takes ownership of the data. Even though we are not writing to it, we will free the pointer on destruction.
|
|
// You can set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed,
|
|
// - Even though many functions are suffixed with "TTF", OTF data is supported just as well.
|
|
// - This is an old API and it is currently awkward for those and and various other reasons! We will address them in the future!
|
|
struct ImFontAtlas
|
|
{
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFontAtlas();
|
|
IMGUI_API ~ImFontAtlas();
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFont(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromFileTTF(const char* filename, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* font_data, int font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // Note: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas! Will be deleted after destruction of the atlas. Set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(const void* compressed_font_data, int compressed_font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(const char* compressed_font_data_base85, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data_base85' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp with -base85 parameter.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearInputData(); // Clear input data (all ImFontConfig structures including sizes, TTF data, glyph ranges, etc.) = all the data used to build the texture and fonts.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearTexData(); // Clear output texture data (CPU side). Saves RAM once the texture has been copied to graphics memory.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearFonts(); // Clear output font data (glyphs storage, UV coordinates).
|
|
IMGUI_API void Clear(); // Clear all input and output.
|
|
|
|
// Build atlas, retrieve pixel data.
|
|
// User is in charge of copying the pixels into graphics memory (e.g. create a texture with your engine). Then store your texture handle with SetTexID().
|
|
// The pitch is always = Width * BytesPerPixels (1 or 4)
|
|
// Building in RGBA32 format is provided for convenience and compatibility, but note that unless you manually manipulate or copy color data into
|
|
// the texture (e.g. when using the AddCustomRect*** api), then the RGB pixels emitted will always be white (~75% of memory/bandwidth waste.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Build(); // Build pixels data. This is called automatically for you by the GetTexData*** functions.
|
|
IMGUI_API void GetTexDataAsAlpha8(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL); // 1 byte per-pixel
|
|
IMGUI_API void GetTexDataAsRGBA32(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL); // 4 bytes-per-pixel
|
|
bool IsBuilt() const { return Fonts.Size > 0 && TexReady; } // Bit ambiguous: used to detect when user didn't built texture but effectively we should check TexID != 0 except that would be backend dependent...
|
|
void SetTexID(ImTextureID id) { TexID = id; }
|
|
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
// Glyph Ranges
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Helpers to retrieve list of common Unicode ranges (2 value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list)
|
|
// NB: Make sure that your string are UTF-8 and NOT in your local code page. In C++11, you can create UTF-8 string literal using the u8"Hello world" syntax. See FAQ for details.
|
|
// NB: Consider using ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to build glyph ranges from textual data.
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesDefault(); // Basic Latin, Extended Latin
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesKorean(); // Default + Korean characters
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesJapanese(); // Default + Hiragana, Katakana, Half-Width, Selection of 2999 Ideographs
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesChineseFull(); // Default + Half-Width + Japanese Hiragana/Katakana + full set of about 21000 CJK Unified Ideographs
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesChineseSimplifiedCommon();// Default + Half-Width + Japanese Hiragana/Katakana + set of 2500 CJK Unified Ideographs for common simplified Chinese
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesCyrillic(); // Default + about 400 Cyrillic characters
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesThai(); // Default + Thai characters
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesVietnamese(); // Default + Vietnamese characters
|
|
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
// [BETA] Custom Rectangles/Glyphs API
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// You can request arbitrary rectangles to be packed into the atlas, for your own purposes.
|
|
// - After calling Build(), you can query the rectangle position and render your pixels.
|
|
// - If you render colored output, set 'atlas->TexPixelsUseColors = true' as this may help some backends decide of prefered texture format.
|
|
// - You can also request your rectangles to be mapped as font glyph (given a font + Unicode point),
|
|
// so you can render e.g. custom colorful icons and use them as regular glyphs.
|
|
// - Read docs/FONTS.md for more details about using colorful icons.
|
|
// - Note: this API may be redesigned later in order to support multi-monitor varying DPI settings.
|
|
IMGUI_API int AddCustomRectRegular(int width, int height);
|
|
IMGUI_API int AddCustomRectFontGlyph(ImFont* font, ImWchar id, int width, int height, float advance_x, const ImVec2& offset = ImVec2(0, 0));
|
|
ImFontAtlasCustomRect* GetCustomRectByIndex(int index) { IM_ASSERT(index >= 0); return &CustomRects[index]; }
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
IMGUI_API void CalcCustomRectUV(const ImFontAtlasCustomRect* rect, ImVec2* out_uv_min, ImVec2* out_uv_max) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API bool GetMouseCursorTexData(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor, ImVec2* out_offset, ImVec2* out_size, ImVec2 out_uv_border[2], ImVec2 out_uv_fill[2]);
|
|
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
// Members
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags Flags; // Build flags (see ImFontAtlasFlags_)
|
|
ImTextureID TexID; // User data to refer to the texture once it has been uploaded to user's graphic systems. It is passed back to you during rendering via the ImDrawCmd structure.
|
|
int TexDesiredWidth; // Texture width desired by user before Build(). Must be a power-of-two. If have many glyphs your graphics API have texture size restrictions you may want to increase texture width to decrease height.
|
|
int TexGlyphPadding; // Padding between glyphs within texture in pixels. Defaults to 1. If your rendering method doesn't rely on bilinear filtering you may set this to 0 (will also need to set AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = false).
|
|
bool Locked; // Marked as Locked by ImGui::NewFrame() so attempt to modify the atlas will assert.
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
// NB: Access texture data via GetTexData*() calls! Which will setup a default font for you.
|
|
bool TexReady; // Set when texture was built matching current font input
|
|
bool TexPixelsUseColors; // Tell whether our texture data is known to use colors (rather than just alpha channel), in order to help backend select a format.
|
|
unsigned char* TexPixelsAlpha8; // 1 component per pixel, each component is unsigned 8-bit. Total size = TexWidth * TexHeight
|
|
unsigned int* TexPixelsRGBA32; // 4 component per pixel, each component is unsigned 8-bit. Total size = TexWidth * TexHeight * 4
|
|
int TexWidth; // Texture width calculated during Build().
|
|
int TexHeight; // Texture height calculated during Build().
|
|
ImVec2 TexUvScale; // = (1.0f/TexWidth, 1.0f/TexHeight)
|
|
ImVec2 TexUvWhitePixel; // Texture coordinates to a white pixel
|
|
ImVector<ImFont*> Fonts; // Hold all the fonts returned by AddFont*. Fonts[0] is the default font upon calling ImGui::NewFrame(), use ImGui::PushFont()/PopFont() to change the current font.
|
|
ImVector<ImFontAtlasCustomRect> CustomRects; // Rectangles for packing custom texture data into the atlas.
|
|
ImVector<ImFontConfig> ConfigData; // Configuration data
|
|
ImVec4 TexUvLines[IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 1]; // UVs for baked anti-aliased lines
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Font builder
|
|
const ImFontBuilderIO* FontBuilderIO; // Opaque interface to a font builder (default to stb_truetype, can be changed to use FreeType by defining IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE).
|
|
unsigned int FontBuilderFlags; // Shared flags (for all fonts) for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILD IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Per-font override is also available in ImFontConfig.
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Packing data
|
|
int PackIdMouseCursors; // Custom texture rectangle ID for white pixel and mouse cursors
|
|
int PackIdLines; // Custom texture rectangle ID for baked anti-aliased lines
|
|
|
|
// [Obsolete]
|
|
//typedef ImFontAtlasCustomRect CustomRect; // OBSOLETED in 1.72+
|
|
//typedef ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder GlyphRangesBuilder; // OBSOLETED in 1.67+
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Font runtime data and rendering
|
|
// ImFontAtlas automatically loads a default embedded font for you when you call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32().
|
|
struct ImFont
|
|
{
|
|
// Members: Hot ~20/24 bytes (for CalcTextSize)
|
|
ImVector<float> IndexAdvanceX; // 12-16 // out // // Sparse. Glyphs->AdvanceX in a directly indexable way (cache-friendly for CalcTextSize functions which only this this info, and are often bottleneck in large UI).
|
|
float FallbackAdvanceX; // 4 // out // = FallbackGlyph->AdvanceX
|
|
float FontSize; // 4 // in // // Height of characters/line, set during loading (don't change after loading)
|
|
|
|
// Members: Hot ~28/40 bytes (for CalcTextSize + render loop)
|
|
ImVector<ImWchar> IndexLookup; // 12-16 // out // // Sparse. Index glyphs by Unicode code-point.
|
|
ImVector<ImFontGlyph> Glyphs; // 12-16 // out // // All glyphs.
|
|
const ImFontGlyph* FallbackGlyph; // 4-8 // out // = FindGlyph(FontFallbackChar)
|
|
|
|
// Members: Cold ~32/40 bytes
|
|
ImFontAtlas* ContainerAtlas; // 4-8 // out // // What we has been loaded into
|
|
const ImFontConfig* ConfigData; // 4-8 // in // // Pointer within ContainerAtlas->ConfigData
|
|
short ConfigDataCount; // 2 // in // ~ 1 // Number of ImFontConfig involved in creating this font. Bigger than 1 when merging multiple font sources into one ImFont.
|
|
ImWchar FallbackChar; // 2 // out // = FFFD/'?' // Character used if a glyph isn't found.
|
|
ImWchar EllipsisChar; // 2 // out // = '...' // Character used for ellipsis rendering.
|
|
ImWchar DotChar; // 2 // out // = '.' // Character used for ellipsis rendering (if a single '...' character isn't found)
|
|
bool DirtyLookupTables; // 1 // out //
|
|
float Scale; // 4 // in // = 1.f // Base font scale, multiplied by the per-window font scale which you can adjust with SetWindowFontScale()
|
|
float Ascent, Descent; // 4+4 // out // // Ascent: distance from top to bottom of e.g. 'A' [0..FontSize]
|
|
int MetricsTotalSurface;// 4 // out // // Total surface in pixels to get an idea of the font rasterization/texture cost (not exact, we approximate the cost of padding between glyphs)
|
|
ImU8 Used4kPagesMap[(IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX+1)/4096/8]; // 2 bytes if ImWchar=ImWchar16, 34 bytes if ImWchar==ImWchar32. Store 1-bit for each block of 4K codepoints that has one active glyph. This is mainly used to facilitate iterations across all used codepoints.
|
|
|
|
// Methods
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont();
|
|
IMGUI_API ~ImFont();
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph*FindGlyph(ImWchar c) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph*FindGlyphNoFallback(ImWchar c) const;
|
|
float GetCharAdvance(ImWchar c) const { return ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size) ? IndexAdvanceX[(int)c] : FallbackAdvanceX; }
|
|
bool IsLoaded() const { return ContainerAtlas != NULL; }
|
|
const char* GetDebugName() const { return ConfigData ? ConfigData->Name : "<unknown>"; }
|
|
|
|
// 'max_width' stops rendering after a certain width (could be turned into a 2d size). FLT_MAX to disable.
|
|
// 'wrap_width' enable automatic word-wrapping across multiple lines to fit into given width. 0.0f to disable.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSizeA(float size, float max_width, float wrap_width, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL, const char** remaining = NULL) const; // utf8
|
|
IMGUI_API const char* CalcWordWrapPositionA(float scale, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, ImWchar c) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void RenderText(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const ImVec4& clip_rect, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, float wrap_width = 0.0f, bool cpu_fine_clip = false) const;
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Don't use!
|
|
IMGUI_API void BuildLookupTable();
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearOutputData();
|
|
IMGUI_API void GrowIndex(int new_size);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddGlyph(const ImFontConfig* src_cfg, ImWchar c, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float u0, float v0, float u1, float v1, float advance_x);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddRemapChar(ImWchar dst, ImWchar src, bool overwrite_dst = true); // Makes 'dst' character/glyph points to 'src' character/glyph. Currently needs to be called AFTER fonts have been built.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetGlyphVisible(ImWchar c, bool visible);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsGlyphRangeUnused(unsigned int c_begin, unsigned int c_last);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Viewports
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Flags stored in ImGuiViewport::Flags, giving indications to the platform backends.
|
|
enum ImGuiViewportFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformWindow = 1 << 0, // Represent a Platform Window
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformMonitor = 1 << 1, // Represent a Platform Monitor (unused yet)
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp = 1 << 2, // Platform Window: is created/managed by the application (rather than a dear imgui backend)
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration = 1 << 3, // Platform Window: Disable platform decorations: title bar, borders, etc. (generally set all windows, but if ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsDecoration is set we only set this on popups/tooltips)
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon = 1 << 4, // Platform Window: Disable platform task bar icon (generally set on popups/tooltips, or all windows if ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsNoTaskBarIcon is set)
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing = 1 << 5, // Platform Window: Don't take focus when created.
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnClick = 1 << 6, // Platform Window: Don't take focus when clicked on.
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs = 1 << 7, // Platform Window: Make mouse pass through so we can drag this window while peaking behind it.
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_NoRendererClear = 1 << 8, // Platform Window: Renderer doesn't need to clear the framebuffer ahead (because we will fill it entirely).
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_TopMost = 1 << 9, // Platform Window: Display on top (for tooltips only).
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized = 1 << 10, // Platform Window: Window is minimized, can skip render. When minimized we tend to avoid using the viewport pos/size for clipping window or testing if they are contained in the viewport.
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_NoAutoMerge = 1 << 11, // Platform Window: Avoid merging this window into another host window. This can only be set via ImGuiWindowClass viewport flags override (because we need to now ahead if we are going to create a viewport in the first place!).
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_CanHostOtherWindows = 1 << 12 // Main viewport: can host multiple imgui windows (secondary viewports are associated to a single window).
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// - Currently represents the Platform Window created by the application which is hosting our Dear ImGui windows.
|
|
// - With multi-viewport enabled, we extend this concept to have multiple active viewports.
|
|
// - In the future we will extend this concept further to also represent Platform Monitor and support a "no main platform window" operation mode.
|
|
// - About Main Area vs Work Area:
|
|
// - Main Area = entire viewport.
|
|
// - Work Area = entire viewport minus sections used by main menu bars (for platform windows), or by task bar (for platform monitor).
|
|
// - Windows are generally trying to stay within the Work Area of their host viewport.
|
|
struct ImGuiViewport
|
|
{
|
|
ImGuiID ID; // Unique identifier for the viewport
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags Flags; // See ImGuiViewportFlags_
|
|
ImVec2 Pos; // Main Area: Position of the viewport (Dear ImGui coordinates are the same as OS desktop/native coordinates)
|
|
ImVec2 Size; // Main Area: Size of the viewport.
|
|
ImVec2 WorkPos; // Work Area: Position of the viewport minus task bars, menus bars, status bars (>= Pos)
|
|
ImVec2 WorkSize; // Work Area: Size of the viewport minus task bars, menu bars, status bars (<= Size)
|
|
float DpiScale; // 1.0f = 96 DPI = No extra scale.
|
|
ImGuiID ParentViewportId; // (Advanced) 0: no parent. Instruct the platform backend to setup a parent/child relationship between platform windows.
|
|
ImDrawData* DrawData; // The ImDrawData corresponding to this viewport. Valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame().
|
|
|
|
// Platform/Backend Dependent Data
|
|
// Our design separate the Renderer and Platform backends to facilitate combining default backends with each others.
|
|
// When our create your own backend for a custom engine, it is possible that both Renderer and Platform will be handled
|
|
// by the same system and you may not need to use all the UserData/Handle fields.
|
|
// The library never uses those fields, they are merely storage to facilitate backend implementation.
|
|
void* RendererUserData; // void* to hold custom data structure for the renderer (e.g. swap chain, framebuffers etc.). generally set by your Renderer_CreateWindow function.
|
|
void* PlatformUserData; // void* to hold custom data structure for the OS / platform (e.g. windowing info, render context). generally set by your Platform_CreateWindow function.
|
|
void* PlatformHandle; // void* for FindViewportByPlatformHandle(). (e.g. suggested to use natural platform handle such as HWND, GLFWWindow*, SDL_Window*)
|
|
void* PlatformHandleRaw; // void* to hold lower-level, platform-native window handle (under Win32 this is expected to be a HWND, unused for other platforms), when using an abstraction layer like GLFW or SDL (where PlatformHandle would be a SDL_Window*)
|
|
bool PlatformRequestMove; // Platform window requested move (e.g. window was moved by the OS / host window manager, authoritative position will be OS window position)
|
|
bool PlatformRequestResize; // Platform window requested resize (e.g. window was resized by the OS / host window manager, authoritative size will be OS window size)
|
|
bool PlatformRequestClose; // Platform window requested closure (e.g. window was moved by the OS / host window manager, e.g. pressing ALT-F4)
|
|
|
|
ImGuiViewport() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
|
|
~ImGuiViewport() { IM_ASSERT(PlatformUserData == NULL && RendererUserData == NULL); }
|
|
|
|
// Helpers
|
|
ImVec2 GetCenter() const { return ImVec2(Pos.x + Size.x * 0.5f, Pos.y + Size.y * 0.5f); }
|
|
ImVec2 GetWorkCenter() const { return ImVec2(WorkPos.x + WorkSize.x * 0.5f, WorkPos.y + WorkSize.y * 0.5f); }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Platform Dependent Interfaces (for e.g. multi-viewport support)
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [BETA] (Optional) This is completely optional, for advanced users!
|
|
// If you are new to Dear ImGui and trying to integrate it into your engine, you can probably ignore this for now.
|
|
//
|
|
// This feature allows you to seamlessly drag Dear ImGui windows outside of your application viewport.
|
|
// This is achieved by creating new Platform/OS windows on the fly, and rendering into them.
|
|
// Dear ImGui manages the viewport structures, and the backend create and maintain one Platform/OS window for each of those viewports.
|
|
//
|
|
// See Glossary https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary for details about some of the terminology.
|
|
// See Thread https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1542 for gifs, news and questions about this evolving feature.
|
|
//
|
|
// About the coordinates system:
|
|
// - When multi-viewports are enabled, all Dear ImGui coordinates become absolute coordinates (same as OS coordinates!)
|
|
// - So e.g. ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(0,0)) will position a window relative to your primary monitor!
|
|
// - If you want to position windows relative to your main application viewport, use ImGui::GetMainViewport()->Pos as a base position.
|
|
//
|
|
// Steps to use multi-viewports in your application, when using a default backend from the examples/ folder:
|
|
// - Application: Enable feature with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable'.
|
|
// - Backend: The backend initialization will setup all necessary ImGuiPlatformIO's functions and update monitors info every frame.
|
|
// - Application: In your main loop, call ImGui::UpdatePlatformWindows(), ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() after EndFrame() or Render().
|
|
// - Application: Fix absolute coordinates used in ImGui::SetWindowPos() or ImGui::SetNextWindowPos() calls.
|
|
//
|
|
// Steps to use multi-viewports in your application, when using a custom backend:
|
|
// - Important: THIS IS NOT EASY TO DO and comes with many subtleties not described here!
|
|
// It's also an experimental feature, so some of the requirements may evolve.
|
|
// Consider using default backends if you can. Either way, carefully follow and refer to examples/ backends for details.
|
|
// - Application: Enable feature with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable'.
|
|
// - Backend: Hook ImGuiPlatformIO's Platform_* and Renderer_* callbacks (see below).
|
|
// Set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports' and 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports'.
|
|
// Update ImGuiPlatformIO's Monitors list every frame.
|
|
// Update MousePos every frame, in absolute coordinates.
|
|
// - Application: In your main loop, call ImGui::UpdatePlatformWindows(), ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() after EndFrame() or Render().
|
|
// You may skip calling RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() if its API is not convenient for your needs. Read comments below.
|
|
// - Application: Fix absolute coordinates used in ImGui::SetWindowPos() or ImGui::SetNextWindowPos() calls.
|
|
//
|
|
// About ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault():
|
|
// - This function is a mostly a _helper_ for the common-most cases, and to facilitate using default backends.
|
|
// - You can check its simple source code to understand what it does.
|
|
// It basically iterates secondary viewports and call 4 functions that are setup in ImGuiPlatformIO, if available:
|
|
// Platform_RenderWindow(), Renderer_RenderWindow(), Platform_SwapBuffers(), Renderer_SwapBuffers()
|
|
// Those functions pointers exists only for the benefit of RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
|
|
// - If you have very specific rendering needs (e.g. flipping multiple swap-chain simultaneously, unusual sync/threading issues, etc.),
|
|
// you may be tempted to ignore RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() and write customized code to perform your renderingg.
|
|
// You may decide to setup the platform_io's *RenderWindow and *SwapBuffers pointers and call your functions through those pointers,
|
|
// or you may decide to never setup those pointers and call your code directly. They are a convenience, not an obligatory interface.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// (Optional) Access via ImGui::GetPlatformIO()
|
|
struct ImGuiPlatformIO
|
|
{
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Input - Backend interface/functions + Monitor List
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// (Optional) Platform functions (e.g. Win32, GLFW, SDL2)
|
|
// For reference, the second column shows which function are generally calling the Platform Functions:
|
|
// N = ImGui::NewFrame() ~ beginning of the dear imgui frame: read info from platform/OS windows (latest size/position)
|
|
// F = ImGui::Begin(), ImGui::EndFrame() ~ during the dear imgui frame
|
|
// U = ImGui::UpdatePlatformWindows() ~ after the dear imgui frame: create and update all platform/OS windows
|
|
// R = ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() ~ render
|
|
// D = ImGui::DestroyPlatformWindows() ~ shutdown
|
|
// The general idea is that NewFrame() we will read the current Platform/OS state, and UpdatePlatformWindows() will write to it.
|
|
//
|
|
// The functions are designed so we can mix and match 2 imgui_impl_xxxx files, one for the Platform (~window/input handling), one for Renderer.
|
|
// Custom engine backends will often provide both Platform and Renderer interfaces and so may not need to use all functions.
|
|
// Platform functions are typically called before their Renderer counterpart, apart from Destroy which are called the other way.
|
|
|
|
// Platform function --------------------------------------------------- Called by -----
|
|
void (*Platform_CreateWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // . . U . . // Create a new platform window for the given viewport
|
|
void (*Platform_DestroyWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // N . U . D //
|
|
void (*Platform_ShowWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // . . U . . // Newly created windows are initially hidden so SetWindowPos/Size/Title can be called on them before showing the window
|
|
void (*Platform_SetWindowPos)(ImGuiViewport* vp, ImVec2 pos); // . . U . . // Set platform window position (given the upper-left corner of client area)
|
|
ImVec2 (*Platform_GetWindowPos)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // N . . . . //
|
|
void (*Platform_SetWindowSize)(ImGuiViewport* vp, ImVec2 size); // . . U . . // Set platform window client area size (ignoring OS decorations such as OS title bar etc.)
|
|
ImVec2 (*Platform_GetWindowSize)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // N . . . . // Get platform window client area size
|
|
void (*Platform_SetWindowFocus)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // N . . . . // Move window to front and set input focus
|
|
bool (*Platform_GetWindowFocus)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // . . U . . //
|
|
bool (*Platform_GetWindowMinimized)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // N . . . . // Get platform window minimized state. When minimized, we generally won't attempt to get/set size and contents will be culled more easily
|
|
void (*Platform_SetWindowTitle)(ImGuiViewport* vp, const char* str); // . . U . . // Set platform window title (given an UTF-8 string)
|
|
void (*Platform_SetWindowAlpha)(ImGuiViewport* vp, float alpha); // . . U . . // (Optional) Setup global transparency (not per-pixel transparency)
|
|
void (*Platform_UpdateWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // . . U . . // (Optional) Called by UpdatePlatformWindows(). Optional hook to allow the platform backend from doing general book-keeping every frame.
|
|
void (*Platform_RenderWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp, void* render_arg); // . . . R . // (Optional) Main rendering (platform side! This is often unused, or just setting a "current" context for OpenGL bindings). 'render_arg' is the value passed to RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
|
|
void (*Platform_SwapBuffers)(ImGuiViewport* vp, void* render_arg); // . . . R . // (Optional) Call Present/SwapBuffers (platform side! This is often unused!). 'render_arg' is the value passed to RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
|
|
float (*Platform_GetWindowDpiScale)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // N . . . . // (Optional) [BETA] FIXME-DPI: DPI handling: Return DPI scale for this viewport. 1.0f = 96 DPI.
|
|
void (*Platform_OnChangedViewport)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // . F . . . // (Optional) [BETA] FIXME-DPI: DPI handling: Called during Begin() every time the viewport we are outputting into changes, so backend has a chance to swap fonts to adjust style.
|
|
int (*Platform_CreateVkSurface)(ImGuiViewport* vp, ImU64 vk_inst, const void* vk_allocators, ImU64* out_vk_surface); // (Optional) For a Vulkan Renderer to call into Platform code (since the surface creation needs to tie them both).
|
|
|
|
// (Optional) Renderer functions (e.g. DirectX, OpenGL, Vulkan)
|
|
void (*Renderer_CreateWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // . . U . . // Create swap chain, frame buffers etc. (called after Platform_CreateWindow)
|
|
void (*Renderer_DestroyWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp); // N . U . D // Destroy swap chain, frame buffers etc. (called before Platform_DestroyWindow)
|
|
void (*Renderer_SetWindowSize)(ImGuiViewport* vp, ImVec2 size); // . . U . . // Resize swap chain, frame buffers etc. (called after Platform_SetWindowSize)
|
|
void (*Renderer_RenderWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp, void* render_arg); // . . . R . // (Optional) Clear framebuffer, setup render target, then render the viewport->DrawData. 'render_arg' is the value passed to RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
|
|
void (*Renderer_SwapBuffers)(ImGuiViewport* vp, void* render_arg); // . . . R . // (Optional) Call Present/SwapBuffers. 'render_arg' is the value passed to RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
|
|
|
|
// (Optional) Monitor list
|
|
// - Updated by: app/backend. Update every frame to dynamically support changing monitor or DPI configuration.
|
|
// - Used by: dear imgui to query DPI info, clamp popups/tooltips within same monitor and not have them straddle monitors.
|
|
ImVector<ImGuiPlatformMonitor> Monitors;
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Output - List of viewports to render into platform windows
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Viewports list (the list is updated by calling ImGui::EndFrame or ImGui::Render)
|
|
// (in the future we will attempt to organize this feature to remove the need for a "main viewport")
|
|
ImVector<ImGuiViewport*> Viewports; // Main viewports, followed by all secondary viewports.
|
|
ImGuiPlatformIO() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } // Zero clear
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// (Optional) This is required when enabling multi-viewport. Represent the bounds of each connected monitor/display and their DPI.
|
|
// We use this information for multiple DPI support + clamping the position of popups and tooltips so they don't straddle multiple monitors.
|
|
struct ImGuiPlatformMonitor
|
|
{
|
|
ImVec2 MainPos, MainSize; // Coordinates of the area displayed on this monitor (Min = upper left, Max = bottom right)
|
|
ImVec2 WorkPos, WorkSize; // Coordinates without task bars / side bars / menu bars. Used to avoid positioning popups/tooltips inside this region. If you don't have this info, please copy the value for MainPos/MainSize.
|
|
float DpiScale; // 1.0f = 96 DPI
|
|
ImGuiPlatformMonitor() { MainPos = MainSize = WorkPos = WorkSize = ImVec2(0, 0); DpiScale = 1.0f; }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// (Optional) Support for IME (Input Method Editor) via the io.SetPlatformImeDataFn() function.
|
|
struct ImGuiPlatformImeData
|
|
{
|
|
bool WantVisible; // A widget wants the IME to be visible
|
|
ImVec2 InputPos; // Position of the input cursor
|
|
float InputLineHeight; // Line height
|
|
|
|
ImGuiPlatformImeData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Obsolete functions and types
|
|
// (Will be removed! Read 'API BREAKING CHANGES' section in imgui.cpp for details)
|
|
// Please keep your copy of dear imgui up to date! Occasionally set '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' in imconfig.h to stay ahead.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
namespace ImGui
|
|
{
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key); // map ImGuiKey_* values into legacy native key index. == io.KeyMap[key]
|
|
#else
|
|
static inline int GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key) { IM_ASSERT(key >= ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END && "ImGuiKey and native_index was merged together and native_index is disabled by IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO. Please switch to ImGuiKey."); return key; }
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
namespace ImGui
|
|
{
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.86 (from November 2021)
|
|
IMGUI_API void CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end); // Calculate coarse clipping for large list of evenly sized items. Prefer using ImGuiListClipper.
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.85 (from August 2021)
|
|
static inline float GetWindowContentRegionWidth() { return GetWindowContentRegionMax().x - GetWindowContentRegionMin().x; }
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.81 (from February 2021)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1); // Helper to calculate size from items_count and height_in_items
|
|
static inline bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)) { return BeginListBox(label, size); }
|
|
static inline void ListBoxFooter() { EndListBox(); }
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.79 (from August 2020)
|
|
static inline void OpenPopupContextItem(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiMouseButton mb = 1) { OpenPopupOnItemClick(str_id, mb); } // Bool return value removed. Use IsWindowAppearing() in BeginPopup() instead. Renamed in 1.77, renamed back in 1.79. Sorry!
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020)
|
|
// Old drag/sliders functions that took a 'float power = 1.0' argument instead of flags.
|
|
// For shared code, you can version check at compile-time with `#if IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 17704`.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power);
|
|
static inline bool DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
static inline bool DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
static inline bool DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
static inline bool DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power);
|
|
static inline bool SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
static inline bool SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
static inline bool SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
static inline bool SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.77 (from June 2020)
|
|
static inline bool BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, ImGuiMouseButton mb, bool over_items) { return BeginPopupContextWindow(str_id, mb | (over_items ? 0 : ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems)); }
|
|
|
|
// Some of the older obsolete names along with their replacement (commented out so they are not reported in IDE)
|
|
//static inline void TreeAdvanceToLabelPos() { SetCursorPosX(GetCursorPosX() + GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); } // OBSOLETED in 1.72 (from July 2019)
|
|
//static inline void SetNextTreeNodeOpen(bool open, ImGuiCond cond = 0) { SetNextItemOpen(open, cond); } // OBSOLETED in 1.71 (from June 2019)
|
|
//static inline float GetContentRegionAvailWidth() { return GetContentRegionAvail().x; } // OBSOLETED in 1.70 (from May 2019)
|
|
//static inline ImDrawList* GetOverlayDrawList() { return GetForegroundDrawList(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.69 (from Mar 2019)
|
|
//static inline void SetScrollHere(float ratio = 0.5f) { SetScrollHereY(ratio); } // OBSOLETED in 1.66 (from Nov 2018)
|
|
//static inline bool IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() { return IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.63 (from Aug 2018)
|
|
//static inline bool IsAnyWindowFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (from Apr 2018)
|
|
//static inline bool IsAnyWindowHovered() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (between Dec 2017 and Apr 2018)
|
|
//static inline void ShowTestWindow() { return ShowDemoWindow(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
|
|
//static inline bool IsRootWindowFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
|
|
//static inline bool IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
|
|
//static inline void SetNextWindowContentWidth(float w) { SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(w, 0.0f)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
|
|
//static inline float GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing() { return GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.82 (from Mars 2021): flags for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), AddImageRounded(), PathRect()
|
|
typedef ImDrawFlags ImDrawCornerFlags;
|
|
enum ImDrawCornerFlags_
|
|
{
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_None = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone, // Was == 0 prior to 1.82, this is now == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone which is != 0 and not implicit
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft, // Was == 0x01 (1 << 0) prior to 1.82. Order matches ImDrawFlags_NoRoundCorner* flag (we exploit this internally).
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight, // Was == 0x02 (1 << 1) prior to 1.82.
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft, // Was == 0x04 (1 << 2) prior to 1.82.
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight, // Was == 0x08 (1 << 3) prior to 1.82.
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_All = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Was == 0x0F prior to 1.82
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_Top = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight,
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_Left = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft,
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_Right = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// RENAMED ImGuiKeyModFlags -> ImGuiModFlags in 1.88 (from April 2022)
|
|
typedef int ImGuiKeyModFlags;
|
|
enum ImGuiKeyModFlags_ { ImGuiKeyModFlags_None = ImGuiModFlags_None, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Ctrl = ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Shift = ImGuiModFlags_Shift, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Alt = ImGuiModFlags_Alt, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Super = ImGuiModFlags_Super };
|
|
|
|
#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
#if defined(__clang__)
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic pop
|
|
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
|
|
#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
#ifdef _MSC_VER
|
|
#pragma warning (pop)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Include imgui_user.h at the end of imgui.h (convenient for user to only explicitly include vanilla imgui.h)
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_H
|
|
#include "imgui_user.h"
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
|